COMMAND REFERENCE

August 31, 1999

 Copyright © 1999 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS AND MAKES
SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc. reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the
time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Plan, 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio
MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3D Surfer, ADE, ADI, Advanced Modeling Extension, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, AME, Animator Pro, Animator
Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Data Extension, AutoCAD Development System, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk
(logo), Autodesk Animator, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University, Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP,
AutoShade, AutoSketch, AutoSolid, AutoSurf, AutoVision, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio,
Design Companion, Drafix, Education by Design, Generic, Generic 3D Drafting, Generic CADD, Generic Software, Geodyssey, Heidi,
HOOPS, Hyperwire, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, Multimedia Explorer, NAAUG, Office Series, Opus,
PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, RadioRay, Rastation, Softdesk, Softdesk (logo), Solution 3000, Tech Talk, Texture Universe, The AEC
Authority, The Auto Architect, TinkerTech, VISION*, WHIP!, WHIP! (logo), Woodbourne, WorkCenter, and World-Creating Toolkit.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D on the PC, ACAD, ActiveShapes, Actrix, Advanced
User Interface, AEC Office, AME Link, Animation Partner, Animation Player, Animation Pro Player, A Studio in Every Computer, ATLAST,
Auto-Architect, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Learning Assistance,
AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Animator Clips,
Autodesk Animator Theatre, Autodesk Device Interface, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk PhotoEDIT, Autodesk Software Developer’s Kit,
Autodesk View DwgX, AutoFlix, AutoPAD, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), ClearScale, Concept Studio, Content
Explorer, cornerStone Toolkit, Design 2000 (logo), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer’s Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design
Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, DWG Linking, DWG Unplugged, DXF, Extending the Design Team, FLI, FLIC, GDX Driver,
Generic 3D, Heads-up Design, Home Series, Kinetix (logo), Lightscape, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Ooga-Chaka, Photo Landscape,
Photoscape, Plugs and Sockets, PolarSnap, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint,
Pro Landscape, QuickCAD, SchoolBox, SketchTools, Suddenly Everything Clicks, Supportdesk, The Dancing Baby (name), The Dancing
Baby (image), Transform Ideas Into Reality, Visual LISP, Visual Syllabus, Volo, and Where Design Connects.

Third Party Software Credits

ACIS ® Copyright © 1994, 1997, 1999 Spatial Technology, Inc., Three-Space Ltd., and Applied Geometry Corp. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Cypress Enable™, Cypress Software, Inc.
dBASE is a registered trademark of Ksoft, Inc.
Portions licensed from D-Cubed Ltd. DCM-2D is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. DCM-2D Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1989-1998
The license management portion of this product is based on Élan License Manager © 1989, 1990, 1998 Élan Computer Group, Inc. All
rights reserved.
Genius is a trademark of Genius CAD Software GmbH and CoKG licensed to Autodesk, Inc., for limited use in connection with: Genius™ 14,
Genius™ LT, Genius™ Desktop, Genius™ Mold, Genius™ Motion, Genius™ Pool, Genius™ Profile, Genius™ SAP, Genius™ TNT, Genius™
Vario.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
LUCA TCP/IP Package, Portions Copyright © 1997 Langener GmbH. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Objective Grid ©, Stingray Software a division of Rogue Wave Software, Inc.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
PKWARE Data Compression Library ©, PKWARE, Inc.
Spread © 1996, Far Point Technologies, Inc.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Issuing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using the Desktop Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using Pulldown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Selecting Options from Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Quick Reference of Commands by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Part Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Surface Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drawing Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AM2DPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
AM2SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Converting Single Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Converting All Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AM3DPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Creating a 3D Helix Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Creating a 3D Spline Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating a 3D Edge Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Creating a 3D Pipe Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
AMABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AMACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Save File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

iii
 AMACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Activating a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Activating an Assembly or Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Activating a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
AMADDCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
AMANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Between Two Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Between Two Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Between a Plane and a Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
AMANNOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
AMARRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
AMASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Assign Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Add New Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
AMASSMPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Assembly Mass Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Select Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Assembly Mass Properties Results Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
New Massprop File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
AMAUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Check External References Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Dependent External References Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
AMAUGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
AMAUTODIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Automatic Dimensioning Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
PowerDim Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
AMBALLOON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
AMBASICPLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
AMBLDFEATNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
AMBLEND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
AMBOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
BOM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
BOM Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
BOM Representation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Balloon Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Properties for ANSI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Assembly Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Export Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Import Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Set Values Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

iv | Contents
AMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
AMBREAKLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AMBROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
AMBROWSERFONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
AMCAPTUREUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
AMCATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Part Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Assembly Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Locate External Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
AMCENLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
AMCHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Chamfer Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
AMCHECKFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Finding the Distance Between Two Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Finding Distance Between a Line and a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Check Point Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
AMCOMBINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
AMCOPYFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
AMCOPYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
File to Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
AMCOPYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Part/Subassembly Out Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Output File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AMCOPYSCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AMCOPYSKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
AMCORNER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
AMCUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
AMDATUMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Datum Identifier Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Modifying Datum Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
AMDATUMTGT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Termination Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Datum Target Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Modifying Datum Target Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
AMDELCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
AMDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
AMDELFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AMDELTRAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
AMDELTWEAKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
AMDELVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
AMDIMALIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
AMDIMARRANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Contents | v
 AMDIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
AMDIMDSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Dimensions as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Dimensions as Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Dimensions as Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
AMDIMFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Dimension Formatter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
AMDIMINSERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
AMDIMJOIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
AMDIRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
AMDISPSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Individual Surface Display Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
AMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
AMDWGDIMDSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Dimensions as Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Dimensions as Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Dimensions as Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
AMDWGVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Create Drawing View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
AMEDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
AMEDGESYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Edge Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
AMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
AMEDITAUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
AMEDITCONST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Edit 3D Constraint Dialog Box (Browser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Edit 3D Constraints Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
AMEDITFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
AMEDITSF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Surface Edit Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
AMEDITTRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Trail Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
AMEDITVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
View Type Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Edge Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
AMEXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Extrusion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
AMEXTRUDESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
AMFACEDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Face Draft Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
AMFACESPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Creating a Planar Face Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Creating a Projected Face Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

vi | Contents
AMFCFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Feature Control Frame Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Modifying Feature Control Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
AMFEATID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Feature Identifier Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Modifying Feature Identifier Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
AMFILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fillet Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
AMFILLET3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AMFILLETSF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fillet Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
AMFITSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fit Spline Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
AMFLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Surface Flow Lines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
AMFLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
AMHOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Hole Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
AMHOLENOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Create Holenote Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Holenote Dimension Style Overrides Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
AMIDFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Autodesk IDF Translator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Edit IDFIN Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
AMINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
AMINTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
AMINTERSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Surface Intersection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
AMJOIN3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Join 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
AMJOINSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
AMLEGIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Legible Entities Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
AMLENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
AMLISTASSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AMLISTPART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
AMLISTVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
AMLOCKSCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
AMLOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Redefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Loft Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Contents | vii
 AMLOFTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Loft Surface Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Polyline Fit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
AMLOFTUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Correcting and Refining Input Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
AMMAKEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
AMMANIPULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Using Rotate/Move Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Using Free Move Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Common Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
AMMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
AMMIGRATEBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
AMMIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
AMMODDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
AMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Switching to Model Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Switching to Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
AMMOVEDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
AMMOVEVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
AMNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
The Part Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
The Assembly Modeling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
AMNOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Note Symbol Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
AMOFFSET3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
AMOFFSETSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
AMOPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Desktop Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Dialog Controls Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Direction Control Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Show Messages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Tolerance/Pickbox Size Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Constraint Display Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Polyline Fit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Approximate Model Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Hatch Patterns Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Layer/Object Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Drafting Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Centerlines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
AMPARDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
AMPARTEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

viii | Contents
AMPARTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
AMPARTLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
AMPARTPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Part Mass Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Save As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
AMPARTREF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
AMPARTREFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Select Source of Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
AMPARTSPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
AMPATTERNDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Hatch Pattern Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
AMPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
AMPOWERDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Power Dimensioning in Model Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Power Dimensioning in Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Power Dimensioning Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Parameters to Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
AMPOWEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Power Editing in Model Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Power Editing in Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
AMPRIMSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Creating a Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Creating a Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Creating a Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Creating a Torus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Using Grips with Primitive Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
AMPROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Solving a Profile Containing One Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Solving a Profile Containing Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Solving a Profile Containing Nested Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Solving a Profile Containing Disjointed Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AMPROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Project To Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Surface Projection Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
AMPROJECT2PLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Projection Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
AMRECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Recover Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Browse/Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Edit Path Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
AMREFDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
AMREFINE3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Contents | ix
 AMREFINESF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
AMREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Refresh External Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
AMRENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Renaming a Part Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Renaming a Part Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Rename Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Renaming a Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Renaming a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
AMREORDFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
AMREPLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Replace Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
AMREPLACEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
AMREPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Constraint Display Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
AMRESTOREUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
AMREVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Revolution Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
AMREVOLVESF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
AMROTCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
AMRSOLVESK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Re-Solving a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Appending a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
AMRULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
AMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
AMSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Surface Cross Sections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
AMSELROT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
AMSHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Shell Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
AMSHOWACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
AMSHOWCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
AMSHOWINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
AMSHOWSKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
AMSKPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Using the Animated Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
AMSOLCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
AMSPLITLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

x | Contents
AMSTITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Surface Stitching Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Custom Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
AMSTLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Angular Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Surface Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Vertex Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Save File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
AMSTYLEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Select Drawing Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Dim Style Importer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Substitute Dimension Style Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
AMSUPPRCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
AMSUPPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Instance Suppression Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
AMSUPPRESSFEAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Suppress by Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table Driven Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Create Table Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Link Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
AMSURFCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
AMSURFPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
AutoSurf Mass Properties Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Create Mass and Area Properties File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
AMSURFSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Surface Texture Symbols with Leaders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Surface Texture Symbols without Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Surface Texture Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Modifying Surface Texture Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
AMSWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Sweep Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
AMSWEEPSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Sweep Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
AMSYMLEADER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Contents | xi
 AMSYMSTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Symbol Standards Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Standard Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Surface Texture Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Feature Control Frame Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Welding Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Datum Target Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
BOM Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Balloon Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Properties for ISO Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Print Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
AMTEMPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Hole Templates Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
AMTOLCONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Transformation of Model Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Manual Control of Dimension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
AMTRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Trail Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
AMTUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
AMTWEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Tweak Part/Subassembly Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
AMUCSFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
AMUCSPERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
AMUNSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Unsuppress by Type Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
AMUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Update Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Update Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Update Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Update Scene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Update Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

xii | Contents
 AMVARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Design Variables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Table Driven Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
AMVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
AMVIEWOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Export Drawing Views to AutoCAD Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
AMVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Controlling Part Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Controlling Assembly Visibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Controlling Scene Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Controlling Drawing Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Desktop Visibility Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
AMVRMLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
AMWELDSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Weld Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Modifying Welding Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
AMWHEREUSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Part/Subassembly Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
AMWORKAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
AMWORKPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Work Plane Feature Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
AMWORKPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
AMXFACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Setting a Scene Explosion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Setting a Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Using the Browser to Set Explosion Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
AMXREFCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Chapter 2 System Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Contents | xiii
xiv
Introduction

In This Chapter

The Command Reference is a comprehensive guide to all

Mechanical Desktop® Release 4 commands, listed in

alphabetical order. In addition to the command listings,

this manual includes information about system variables,

the ways to issue commands, and a quick reference of

commands by functional area.

1
Issuing Commands
You can issue commands several ways: right-click menus in the Desktop
Browser, select toolbar icons or options from menus, enter the command
name on the command line, or enter an abbreviation of the command, called
an accelerator key, on the command line.
Here is an example of how command access is presented in this manual:
Browser Right-click the background and choose New Part.
In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New
Part.
Toolbutton New Part
Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part
Command AMNEW

Using the Desktop Browser

Most of the commands in Mechanical Desktop can be accessed with the
Browser menus. There are two types of menus: those you activate by right-
clicking on an existing object in the Browser, and those you activate by right-
clicking in the Browser background.

The menus that are displayed when you right-click an object change,
depending on the type of object you have selected. Options that are not
available are gray.

2 | Introduction
The menus accessed by right-clicking in the Browser background change
depending on whether you are in the Single Part, Part/Assembly, Scene, or
Drawing environment.

Using Context Menus

In addition to the Browser menus, context-sensitive menus are available in
the graphics area as you are working on your model. When you start
Mechanical Desktop, the Part menu is available in the graphics area. You can
toggle between the Part and Assembly menus as you build your models.
When you are in Scene mode, the Scene menu is available. In Drawing mode,
you can toggle between the Drawing and Annotate menus.

Using Toolbars
Toolbars have icons to represent frequently used commands, settings, and
environments. You can choose an icon instead of selecting a command from
a menu or entering its name on the command line. When you pause with
the mouse selection arrow on an icon, the command action is shown at the
bottom of the screen. A tooltip also appears under the mouse pointer. Click
the left mouse button to select the command.

Some icons have a subtoolbar (flyout) with related icons. If the icon has a
small arrow in the lower right corner, drag the mouse to reveal the additional
icons, and then select one.

To hide a toolbar, click the button in its upper left corner. To unhide it, right-
click any toolbar. In the Toolbars dialog box, find the toolbar to redisplay and
click the dialog box to the left of its description.
To return the Mechanical Desktop toolbars to their default positions, choose
View ➤ Toolbars ➤ Desktop Express (Left). If you prefer the toolbars at the
right of your screen, choose Desktop Express (Right).

Issuing Commands | 3
 To display larger toolbar icons, right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Select Large Buttons at the bottom left of the Toolbars dialog box.
If you choose Large Buttons and you want to display the toolbars in a docked
position in the screen header area, above the command line, or at either side
of the screen, some toolbar icons may not be visible. In that case, you can
drag the toolbar onto the screen.

Using Pulldown Menus

To select a menu option or access a submenu, hold down the left mouse but-
ton while you navigate through the menu. When you find the command you
want, release the mouse button.
You can also access menu commands by using the keyboard. Hold down ALT
while selecting the underlined letter of the menu option. For example, to
select AMPROFILE from the keyboard, press ALT, then P, S, P.

Selecting Options from Dialog Boxes

Many commands have options within dialog boxes. As the term dialog box
suggests, you interact by selecting options to make a particular setting active,
display a list of options, or enter a specific value. If a command has a dialog
box, it is displayed whether you access the command on the command line
or from a menu or toolbar icon.
To get help on using a dialog box, click its Help button. Many dialog boxes
also feature “What’s This?” Help. Click the ? button in the upper right corner
of the dialog box and then click an option to find out more about it.

Using the Command Line

You can directly access a command or system variable by entering its name on
the command line. Many experienced users prefer this method because it is
faster than using menus. Some experienced users are familiar with specifying
command options from the command line and prefer to turn off the display
of dialog boxes.
However, because many Mechanical Desktop 4 commands require input
through their dialog boxes, it is recommended that you use the dialog boxes
instead of the command line to ensure that you have access to the full func-
tionality of each feature. If for some reason the Mechanical Desktop dialog
boxes do not display, set the AutoCAD® CMDDIA system variable to 1.
All the commands and system variables for Mechanical Desktop 4 and
AutoCAD are documented in Help.

4 | Introduction
 Using Accelerator Keys
Many commands also have shortcuts called accelerator keys. To issue a com-
mand using an accelerator key, enter the command alias on the command
line. For a complete list of Mechanical Desktop accelerator keys, see appendix
B, “Accelerator Keys,” in the Getting Started manual.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function

This section provides a brief description of each command in Mechanical
Desktop. The commands are divided into six tables according to functional
area:

■ Part Modeling
■ Assembly Modeling
■ Surface Modeling
■ Scenes
■ Drawing Layout
■ General

Use these tables as a quick reference to locate the command you want to use.
To see a list of toolbar icons by functional area, see appendix A, “Toolbar
Icons,” in the Getting Started manual.

Part Modeling
Use these commands to build and edit parts in Model mode.

Part Modeling

Command Description

AM2DPATH Creates a path for a sweep feature from an open or closed sketch.

AM3DPATH Creates a 3D path for sweep features.

AMADDCON Applies 2D parametric constraints to solved sketches.

AMARRAY Creates rectangular and polar arrays of features on the active part.

AMAUTODIM Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode.

AMBASICPLANES Creates static work planes based on top, front, and side views of a specified point.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 5

Part Modeling (continued)

Command Description

AMBREAKLINE Creates a break line sketch to use for a breakout section drawing view.

AMCAPTUREUCS Saves the current UCS and sketch plane.

AMCATALOG Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a
combined part file or an assembly file.

AMCHAMFER Creates a chamfer on the selected edge(s) of the active part.

AMCOMBINE Combines the active base part with another parametric part, called the toolbody.

AMCOPYFEAT Copies sketched and hole features, feature sets, or new features within the same
part or from one part to another.

AMCOPYSKETCH Selects single sketch to copy and specifies placement of the sketch center.

AMCUTLINE Creates a cut line sketch for an offset section view.

AMDELCON Removes constraints from the selected sketch.

AMDELFEAT Deletes features from the selected part.

AMDIMARRANGE Arranges dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMDIMDSP Changes the display mode for dimensions.

AMEDITFEAT Edits existing features by displaying and modifying dimension values.

AMEXTRUDE Creates an extruded solid feature.

AMFACEDRAFT Creates a face draft or slight angle on the faces of a part.

AMFACESPLIT Creates two faces from one face.

AMFILLET Creates a smoothly fitted blend with a constant or variable radius between faces.

AMHOLE Creates drilled, counterbored, or countersunk holes that may be terminated on

planar faces.

AMLISTPART Displays part, feature, and view information.

AMLOFT Creates a solid shape through profiles.

AMMAKEBASE Converts the active part into a static base feature.

6 | Introduction
Part Modeling (continued)

Command Description

AMMANIPULATOR Dynamically rotates, copies, and moves parts along selected axes, or freely in 3D
space.

AMMIRROR Generates a mirrored copy of a part.

AMMODDIM Modifies parametric dimensions on sketches and drawings.

AMPARDIM Creates parametric dimensions in Model mode.

AMPARTEDGE Creates a line or an arc on a selected edge to use in a new profile.

AMPARTPROP Lists the mass properties of the active part.

AMPOWERDIM Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMPOWEREDIT Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects.

AMPROFILE Solves 2D geometry to create a constrained sketch.

AMPROJECT2PLN Projects planar objects and 3D faces to a work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face.

AMREORDFEAT Changes the order of a feature in the part creation history.

AMREPLAY Displays the steps used to create features of the selected part.

AMRESTOREUCS Restores a sketch plane associated with a saved UCS.

AMREVOLVE Creates a revolved solid feature from the selected profile.

AMRSOLVESK Displays the number of constraints needed to fully constrain a sketch, or appends
new geometry to a sketch.

AMSHELL Creates a shell feature with an assigned wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses.

AMSHOWACT Highlights the active part or sketch plane.

AMSHOWCON Displays 2D constraint symbols on the selected sketch.

AMSHOWSKETCH Highlights geometry on the current sketch plane.

AMSKPLN Sets the sketch plane location and XY axes orientation.

AMSPLITLINE Solves an open or closed line sketch to divide a part or a face.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT Suppresses features on the active part, either manually or by using an external
table.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 7

Part Modeling (continued)

Command Description

AMSURFCUT Cuts free-form surface shapes on solid models.

AMSWEEP Creates a solid feature from a profile moved along a path.

AMUCSFACE Aligns the UCS with a selected face.

AMUCSPERP Creates a UCS perpendicular to a line.

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT Unsuppresses suppressed part features.

AMVARS Creates and manages active part and global design variables and provides table
driven parts by linking to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets.

AMWORKAXIS Creates a work axis at the centerline of a cylindrical, conical, or toroidal surface.

AMWORKPLN Creates a work plane at a specified location.

AMWORKPT Creates work points on the active sketch plane.

Assembly Modeling
Use these commands to build and modify assemblies and subassemblies in
Model mode.

Assembly Modeling

Command Description

AMACTIVATE Activates a specified part, subassembly, assembly, or scene.

AMANGLE Creates an angular assembly constraint.

AMASSIGN Gives a value to a part attribute or adds a new user-defined attribute to the part
definition.

AMASSMPROP Generates mass properties information about parts and subassemblies.

AMAUDIT Lists externally referenced drawing files that need updating.

AMBOM Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists.

8 | Introduction
Assembly Modeling (continued)

Command Description

AMCATALOG Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a
combined part file or an assembly file.

AMCOPYIN Places an external part or assembly in the current drawing.

AMCOPYOUT Places a part or subassembly in an external file.

AMDELETE Deletes part definitions, part instances, and scenes from the current assembly
model.

AMDIST Measures the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or parametric parts.

AMEDITCONST Changes distance and angle offsets in constraints and deletes individual or all
assembly constraints.

AMFLUSH Creates a parallel constraint at a specified offset between two planes.

AMINSERT Creates a constraint to make two circular edges share the same axis and to make
their planes coplanar.

AMINTERFERE Checks for interference between parts in an assembly or a combined part file.

AMLISTASSM Returns information about part instances.

AMMATE Creates a mate constraint between two parts.

AMNEW Converts a 3D solid into a part, and creates new part definitions, part instances,
subassemblies, and scenes.

AMPARTSPLIT Splits the active part into two parts about a work plane or planar face.

AMPATTERNDEF Sets hatching pattern attributes for part definitions.

AMREFRESH Updates external part or subassembly definitions.

AMRENAME Renames an active part definition, part instance, scene, or drawing view.

AMREPLACE Changes definitions for part or subassembly instances.

AMSHOWINST Highlights selected part instances in the Desktop Browser.

AMWHEREUSED Shows where a part or subassembly definition is used.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 9

 Surface Modeling
Use these commands to create and modify surfaces in Model mode.

Surface Modeling

Command Description

AM2SF Changes objects into surfaces.

AMAUGMENT Creates augmented lines from surface edges, internal trim lines, and display lines.

AMBLEND Creates a surface between two, three, or four wires or surfaces.

AMBREAK Breaks one surface into two surfaces along a specified edge.

AMCHECKFIT Measures the distance between objects.

AMCORNER Creates a blended fillet corner surface from three intersecting fillet surfaces.

AMDIRECTION Displays the direction of objects and reverses their direction.

AMDISPSF Controls how surfaces are displayed.

AMEDGE Untrims, copies, and extracts edges of surfaces, and shows edge nodes of surfaces
and faces.

AMEDITAUG Resizes, rotates, copies, and corrects vectors on augmented lines and creates
augmented lines from lines and polylines.

AMEDITSF Changes the density of surface grip points, changes the grip span and the direction
of surface normals, and truncates surfaces.

AMEXTRUDESF Creates a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or polyline.

AMFILLET3D Creates a smoothly fitted arc of constant radius between wires.

AMFILLETSF Creates a fillet surface along the intersection of two surfaces.

AMFITSPLINE Smooths wire objects by fitting them with a smooth NURBS spline.

AMFLOW Creates flow wires in the U and V directions.

AMINTERSF Intersects two surfaces and creates a 3D polyline at the intersection.

AMJOIN3D Joins wires to form one 3D polyline, spline, or augmented line.

AMJOINSF Joins two or more surfaces at their untrimmed base edges into one continuous
surface.

10 | Introduction
Surface Modeling (continued)

Command Description

AMLENGTHEN Extends or shortens base surface edges by a percentage or distance.

AMLOFTU Creates a surface through a set of wires.

AMLOFTUV Creates a surface through two sets of wires.

AMOFFSET3D Creates copies of 3D polylines that are set off from the original.

AMOFFSETSF Creates a surface offset from a selected surface.

AMPARTLINE Creates a 3D polyline on the profile of the surface in the current view.

AMPLANE Creates one or more planar surfaces.

AMPRIMSF Creates a cone, cylinder, torus, and sphere.

AMPROJECT Projects a wire onto a surface.

AMREFINE3D Changes the point density of lines and 3D polylines.

AMREFINESF Refines surfaces by increasing or decreasing the number of U and V patches.

AMREPLACEDGE Replaces a surface edge with an edge of another surface.

AMREVOLVESF Creates a surface by rotating a path wire around a selected axis.

AMRULE Creates a straight element surface between two wires.

AMSCALE Scales wires and surfaces along their axes by a specified factor.

AMSECTION Creates section cuts through one or more surfaces.

AMSOLCUT Cuts an AutoCAD solid model with a Mechanical Desktop surface.

AMSTITCH Stitches surfaces together and heals gaps between existing surfaces.

AMSURFPROP Calculates the mass properties of surfaces.

AMSWEEPSF Creates a surface by sweeping cross sections along one or two rails.

AMTUBE Creates a tubular surface around a selected wire that becomes the axis of the tube.

AMUNSPLINE Converts a spline to an angular or smooth polyline.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 11

 Scenes
Use these commands to create and modify scenes in Model mode.

Scenes

Command Description

AMCOPYSCENE Makes a copy of the active scene.

AMDELTRAIL Deletes a selected trail.

AMDELTWEAKS Deletes all tweaks associated with the selected parts.

AMEDITTRAIL Modifies the explosion path start and end offsets in an assembly scene.

AMLOCKSCENE Locks the position of part instances on a scene-by-scene basis.

AMSUPPRESS Suppresses the display of instances in a scene.

AMTRAIL Adds an explosion path to an assembly scene.

AMTWEAK Adjusts the position of a part or subassembly in an exploded assembly scene.

AMXFACTOR Controls the explosion factor for scenes.

Drawing Layout
Use these commands to create, modify, and annotate drawing views in
Drawing mode.

Drawing Layout

Command Description

AMANNOTE Creates, adds, moves, or deletes drawing annotations.

AMAUTODIM Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode.

AMBALLOON Creates and places balloons.

AMBOM Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists.

AMCENLINE Creates a parametric centerline in Drawing mode.

AMDATUMID Creates datums represented as frames containing an alphabetic character.

12 | Introduction
Drawing Layout (continued)

Command Description

AMDATUMTGT Creates datum target symbols.

AMDELVIEW Deletes specified views and all views dependent upon them.

AMDIMALIGN Aligns linear, rotated, aligned, or angular dimensions with a base dimension of the
same type.

AMDIMBREAK Creates breaks in an existing dimension or extension line of a single associative

dimension, while maintaining associativity.

AMDIMFORMAT Edits individual linear, radial, diameter, or angular dimensions, using a graphical
interface, and reflects changes in your drawing while you use the Dimension
Formatter dialog box.

AMDIMINSERT Edits linear, aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions by inserting a new dimension
between existing dimensions of the same type simultaneously, as opposed to
inserting dimensions individually.

AMDIMJOIN Edits linear, aligned, and angular (3-point or 2-line) dimensions by joining similar
dimensions into a single dimension.

AMDWGDIMDSP Changes the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode.

AMDWGVIEW Creates base, orthographic, auxiliary, isometric, detail, section, and broken drawing
views.

AMEDGESYM Creates a symbol that defines the condition of a selected edge.

AMEDIT Edits welding, surface texture, datum and feature identifier symbols, feature control
frames, and datum targets.

AMEDITVIEW Modifies the scale, associativity, and hidden line display of a drawing view.

AMFCFRAME Creates a feature control frame.

AMFEATID Creates a feature identifier symbol.

AMHOLENOTE Creates custom diameter, depth, and angle information for standard hole notes.

AMLEGIBLE Creates 2D entities representing parts and assemblies in drawing views.

AMLISTVIEW Lists view information in a text window.

AMMIGRATEBB Converts data from previous Genius™ releases so that it can be used in Mechanical
Desktop 4.

AMMOVEDIM Controls location of dimensions in Drawing mode.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 13

Drawing Layout (continued)

Command Description

AMMOVEVIEW Moves a drawing view in Drawing mode.

AMNOTE Attaches an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in Drawing mode.

AMPARTLIST Creates and places a parts list in a drawing.

AMPARTREF Creates a reference to a part.

AMPARTREFEDIT Edits data associated with a part reference.

AMPOWERDIM Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

AMPOWEREDIT Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects.

AMREFDIM Creates Drawing mode reference dimensions between part edges created in Model
mode, and a limited set of objects created in Drawing mode.

AMSTYLEI Imports dimension styles defined in any DWG file without your having to attach
and detach or insert an entire drawing.

AMSURFSYM Adds surface texture finish symbols to drawings.

AMSYMLEADER Adds or removes leaders from existing symbols.

AMSYMSTD Edits and defines drafting standards for symbols.

AMTEMPLATE Creates, renames, and edits templates for hole notes.

AMTOLCONDITION Controls tolerances used by parametric dimensions.

AMVIEWOUT Converts Mechanical Desktop drawing views to AutoCAD 2D data.

AMWELDSYM Creates a welding symbol.

General
Use these commands to control overall settings and general functions in
Mechanical Desktop.

14 | Introduction
General

Command Description

AMABOUT Displays version and copyright information.

AMACISOUT Exports parts and assemblies directly to ACIS files for import into other applications.

AMBLDFEATNM Changes the Browser feature names to the localized language.

AMBROWSER Controls the display of the Desktop Browser.

AMBROWSERFONT Changes the text font and size used by the Desktop Browser.

AMIDFIN Reads printed circuit board (PCB) data in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) and
converts it to AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects.

AMMODE Controls whether Model or Drawing mode is in effect.

AMOPTIONS Manages part, assembly, surface, scene, drawing, and desktop preferences from a
single dialog box.

AMRECOVER Audits a file and fixes any errors.

AMROTCENTER Calculates a new center of rotation at the 3D center of all visible objects.

AMSELROT Calculates a new center of rotation by allowing the user to specify a point for the
rotation.

AMSTLOUT Outputs solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies to the STL format used for stereo
lithography.

AMSUPPRCOLOR Controls the color of suppressed dimensions and DOF symbols.

AMUPDATE Regenerates the active part, assembly, scene, or drawing view to reflect new
dimensions, constraints, and changes to existing features.

AMVIEW Controls viewing in Model mode.

AMVISIBLE Controls the visibility of work features, parts, assemblies, scenes, drawings, and
geometric objects.

AMVRMLOUT Converts selected objects to VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) to be

viewed on a Web page.

AMXREFCONVERT Simplifies the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, and
multiline styles that are imported with external references and remain after the
external references have been localized.

Quick Reference of Commands by Function | 15

16
Commands

In This Chapter
1
This chapter contains a comprehensive description of ■ Using commands

each Mechanical Desktop® command. The commands

are listed in alphabetical order. Each description includes

the different methods for issuing the command.

The command reference information in this chapter is

also available in online Help. From the Help menu,

choose Reference Topics. Select Quick Reference of

Commands, then Mechanical Desktop.

17
AM2DPATH
Creates a path for a sweep feature from an open or closed sketch

Use AM2DPATH to create paths for sweep features. AM2DPATH solves the 2D
geometry and dimensions on the active sketch plane. Paths are used in sweep
features to describe the trajectory that the profile sweeps along.
In addition to creating 2D paths, use AM2DPATH to

■ Create a work plane perpendicular to the start of a path

■ Automatically place a work point at the start of a path

work point created work point and work plane created

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch

Solving ➤ 2D Path.
Toolbutton 2D Path
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 2D Path
Command AM2DPATH

Select objects: Select objects

Select objects: Select more objects or press ENTER to continue
Select start point of the path: Specify a point near the beginning of the path
Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints.
Create a profile plane perpendicular to the path? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Yes
Places a work plane and a work point at the start of the path.
Plane=Parametric, ENTER to Accept
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate]: Choose an option or press ENTER

18 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Z-Flip
Flips the direction of the Z axis for the work plane.
Rotate
Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

No
Places a work point at the start of the path, but not a work plane.

AM2SF
Changes objects into surfaces

AM2SF changes the following objects into 3D surfaces

■ Arcs, circles, lines, and polylines with thickness

■ 3D polygon meshes
■ AutoCAD solids and bodies
■ Mechanical Desktop solid parts

Use AM2SF to convert individual faces or all faces of a 3D object. If you are
converting a Mechanical Desktop part, save a copy of your drawing first.
AM2SF does not keep the original part.

parametric part surfaced part

Avoid converting 3D polygon meshes that haven’t been smoothed. Such a

conversion creates blended areas between each facet.
AM2SF ignores the width of polylines.

NOTE Some solids produce multiple surfaces.

AM2SF | 19
 Converting Single Faces
Toolbutton Convert Face
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ From ACAD
Command AM2SF

Enter an option [Face/Objects] <Objects>: Enter f to select a single face

Converting All Faces

Toolbutton Convert All
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ From ACAD
Command AM2SF

Enter an option [Face/Objects] <Objects>: Press ENTER to select objects

Face
Converts selected faces of 3D objects into trimmed surfaces. The original
object is not changed or deleted.
Select face: Select a face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to toggle to the next face, or press ENTER to continue
Select face: Select another face, or press ENTER

Objects
Converts all faces of selected objects into trimmed surfaces. The original
object is deleted.
Select objects: Select an object
Select objects: Select another object, or press ENTER

AM3DPATH
Creates a 3D path for sweep features

Use AM3DPATH to create a

■ Helical path
■ Spline path
■ Pipe center path
■ Path from existing part edges

20 | Chapter 1 Commands
Creating a 3D Helix Path
Helical paths are used to create swept features such as threads, springs, and
coils. You must have an existing work axis, circular edge, or circular face
before you can create a helical path.

circular 3D helix path elliptical 3D helix path

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch

Solving ➤ 3D Helix Path.
Toolbutton 3D Path
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Helix Path
Command AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] <Helical>: Press ENTER to continue

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command
method.
Select work axis, circular edge, or circular face for helical center:
Select an existing work axis, circular edge, or circular face

Helix Dialog Box

AM3DPATH | 21
 Type
Determines the type of controls to use to define the path.
Pitch and Creates a 3D path using a specified number of
Revolution revolutions and the pitch between revolutions.
Revolution Creates a 3D path with a specified number of revolutions
and Height and the overall height.
Height and Pitch Creates a 3D path using an overall height and the pitch
between revolutions.
Spiral Creates a planar path controlled by the number of
revolutions and the pitch between revolutions.
Orientation
Controls the direction and start angle of the path. Specify whether the path
rotates clockwise or counter-clockwise, and define a start angle from the
sketch plane that the path starts from.
Shape
Controls the shape of the path, its overall diameter, the major and minor
axes of an elliptical path, and the taper angle.
Circle Creates a circular path.
Ellipse Creates an elliptical path.

NOTE If you choose to create a circular path, specify the diameter. If you
choose to create an elliptical path, specify the major and minor axes.

Taper Angle Controls the amount of taper applied to the path.

Profile Plane
Controls whether a work plane is created and where it is located.
None No work plane is created.
Center Axis/Path A work plane is created aligned with the start of the path
and the work axis used to create the path.
Normal to Path A work plane is created perpendicular to the start point
of the path.

22 | Chapter 1 Commands
Creating a 3D Spline Path
3D spline paths create features, such as hangers, tubes, and complex wire
shapes, that are swept along a 3D spline.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch

Solving ➤ 3D Spline Path.
Toolbutton 3D Path
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Spline Path
Command AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] <Helical>: Enter s and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command
method.
Select 3D spline path source: Specify a spline
Specify start point: Specify an endpoint

3D Spline Path Dialog Box

No.
Lists the control points of the path. Select a fit point, and right-click to dis-
play a menu. You can constrain a fit point to a work point or a path point,
unconstrain a fit point, delete a fit point, or insert a new fit point.

AM3DPATH | 23
 C
Indicates the type of constraint applied to the fit point.
From
Indicates constraint relationships with another fit point on the spline.
Delta X, Delta Y, Delta Z
Indicates the distance the selected fit point is located from the origin of the
path along the X, Y, and Z axes of the sketch plane. Click any field to adjust
the value.
C
Indicates whether a tangency constraint is applied to a fit point.
I, J, K
Control tangency vectors into and out of a spline. These fields are available
only for the spline’s start points and endpoints.
Weight
Determines the distance a spline segment maintains tangency before it tran-
sitions to the next fit point.
Create Work Plane
This option creates a work plane at the start point of the 3D path.
Plane=Parametric
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Z-Flip Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane.

Rotate Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

Creating a 3D Edge Path

3D edge paths are used to sweep a feature along the path of existing part
edges.

24 | Chapter 1 Commands
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving
➤ 3D Edge Path.
Toolbutton 3D Path
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Edge Path
Command AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] <Helical>: Enter e and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command
method.
Select model edges (to add): Specify a part edge
Select model edges (to add):
Specify another part edge, or press ENTER
Specify start point: Specify a point
Create workplane? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Choose an option or press ENTER

No
Exits the command without creating a work plane.

Yes
Creates a work plane and a sketch plane normal to the start of the path.
Plane=Parametric
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Z-Flip
Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane.
Rotate
Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

Creating a 3D Pipe Path

3D pipe paths are used to sweep a feature along a path that is defined by fil-
leted lines and polylines.

AM3DPATH | 25
 Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch Solving
➤ 3D Pipe Path.
Toolbutton 3D Path
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ 3D Pipe Path
Command AM3DPATH

Path type: [Helical/Spline/Pipe/Edge] <Helical>: Enter p and press ENTER

The first prompt is displayed only if you are using the toolbutton or command
method.
Select polyline path source: Specify a polyline, arc, or line segment
Select polyline path source: Specify another segment, or press ENTER
Specify start point: Specify a start point

3D Pipe Path Dialog Box

No.
Lists the fit points of the path. Select a fit point, and right-click to display a
menu. You can constrain a fit point to a work point or a path point, uncon-
strain a fit point, delete a fit point, or insert a new fit point.
C
Indicates the type of constraint applied to the fit point.
From
Indicates constraint relationships with another fit point on the spline.
Delta X, Delta Y, Delta Z
Indicates the distance the selected fit point is located from the origin of the
path along the X, Y, and Z axes of the sketch plane. Click in any field to
adjust the value.

26 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Length
Indicates the length of the selected segment. Click the field to change the
value.
Angle XY
Indicates the angle of the segment in the World XY plane. Click the field to
change the value.
Angle Z
Indicates the angle of the segment from the World Z axis. Click the field to
change the value.
Radius
Indicates the radius of the segment. Click the field to change the value.
Create Work Plane
This option creates a work plane at the start point of the 3D path.
Plane=Parametric
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Z-Flip Flips the direction of the Z axis of the work plane.

Rotate Rotates the XY axes of the work plane.

AMABOUT
Displays version and copyright information

AMABOUT displays the Mechanical Desktop version and copyright information,

and the contents of the message file mcad.msg.

NOTE You can customize the mcad.msg file. Use any text editor that saves in
ASCII format. For example, you can replace the contents of the file with a company
banner or user instructions. You can delete the file and no message is displayed.

Desktop Menu Help ➤ About Mechanical Desktop

Command AMABOUT

AMABOUT | 27
AMACISOUT
Exports parts and assemblies directly to ACIS files for import into other applications

Use AMACISOUT to export parts and assemblies directly to .sat files that can
be read by other applications. ACIS models retain the associations between
spatial orientations, but the parametrics are lost.
To control which version of ACIS to export to, use the ACISOUTVER system
variable. The default value is 0, which exports data to ACIS v.5.0.
Command AMACISOUT

Select parts, subassemblies, or 3D solids for output: Select objects

Select parts, subassemblies, or 3D solids for output: Select objects or press ENTER

Save File Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder for the .sat file.

File Name
Specifies the file name.

28 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Save as Type
Specifies the type of file to save.

Save
Saves the file you have specified.

Cancel
Cancels the operation.

AMACTIVATE
Activates a specified part, subassembly, assembly, or scene

Use AMACTIVATE to activate

■ A local part or an external part

■ An unconsumed toolbody in the Part Modeling environment
■ A subassembly or an assembly
■ A scene

You can make modifications only if the part, unconsumed toolbody, subas-
sembly, assembly, or scene is active.

Activating a Part
Browser Right-click the part icon and choose Activate Part.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤
Activate Part.
Toolbutton Activate Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Activate Part
Command AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME)

Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Press ENTER
Select part to activate (or ?) <ACTIVE PARTNAME>:
Specify a name, enter ?, select a part on screen, or press ENTER

AMACTIVATE | 29
 Activating an Assembly or Subassembly
Browser Right-click the assembly or subassembly icon and choose
Activate Assembly.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤
Activate Assembly.
Toolbutton Activate Assembly
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Activate Assembly
Command AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME)

Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter a and press ENTER
Activate assembly (or ?) <ACTIVE ASSEMBLYNAME>:
Specify a name, enter ?, or press ENTER

Activating a Scene
Browser Right-click the scene icon and choose Activate Scene.
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Activate Scene
Command AMACTIVATE

(Active: Part PARTNAME, Assembly DRAWINGNAME, Scene SCENENAME)

Activate: [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter s and press ENTER
Scene to activate (or ?) <ACTIVE SCENENAME>: Specify a name or press ENTER

AMADDCON
Applies 2D parametric constraints to solved sketches

Use AMADDCON to add parametric constraints to a selected profile, path, split

line, or cut line sketch. You can turn constraints on and off, control their text
size, and delete them as required.
For information about

■ Turning constraints on and off, see “AMSHOWCON” on page 320

■ Adjusting constraint text size, see “AMOPTIONS” on page 232
■ Deleting constraints, see “AMDELCON” on page 111

30 | Chapter 1 Commands
When you create a profile or path, each object in the sketch is numbered. If
a constraint is between two objects, the number of the partner object follows
the constraint symbol.

preliminary sketch 2D constraints added

Use AMADDCON to

■ Add constraints between the current sketch and existing model edges,
work planes, or work axes that are not part of the selected sketch geometry
■ Clean up loosely sketched geometry where the sketch did not solve as you
expected
■ Reduce the number of dimensions required to constrain a sketch

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D

Constraints. Choose a constraint from the flyout menu.
Toolbutton Select the appropriate toolbutton from the 2D
Constraints toolbar.
Desktop Menu Part ➤ 2D Constraints
Command AMADDCON

[Hor/Ver/PErp/PAr/Tan/CL/CN/PRoj/Join/XValue/YValue/Radius/Length/Mir/Fix]:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Hor
Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be horizontal.
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select an object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select another object or press ENTER

Ver
Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be vertical.
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select an object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select another object or press ENTER

AMADDCON | 31
 Perp
Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be perpendicular.
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be made perpendicular to:
Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select first object or press ENTER

Par
Forces line, ellipse, and spline segments to be parallel.
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be made parallel to: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Tan
Forces lines, circles, arcs, ellipse, and spline segments to be tangent.
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be made tangent to: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

CL
Forces line and spline segments to be collinear.
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to be made collinear to: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

32 | Chapter 1 Commands
CN
Forces arcs, circles, ellipses, and work points to be concentric.
Valid selection(s): arc, circle or ellipse
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): arc, circle, or ellipse, or work point
Select object to be made concentric to: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): arc, circle or ellipse
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Proj
Forces lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, and splines to be projected to another
object in the sketch. An object snap must be used to specify which point on
the first object is projected to the second object.
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Specify a point to project: Select the first object using an object snap
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse, work point or spline segment
Select object to be projected to: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Specify a point to project: Select the first object or press ENTER

Join
Joins two objects together.
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Specify the first point to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse, work point or spline segment
Specify the second point to be joined to:
Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, circle, arc, ellipse or spline segment
Specify the first point to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

XValue
Forces the centers of arcs and circles, or the endpoints of lines, arcs, and
splines to have the same X value.
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object x value is based on: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

AMADDCON | 33
 YValue
Forces the centers of arcs and circles, or the endpoints of lines, arcs, and
splines to have the same Y value.
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object y value is based on: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line, arc, circle, or spline segment
Select object to be reoriented: Select the first object or press ENTER

Radius
Forces arcs and circles to have the same radius.
Valid selection(s): arc or circle
Select object to be resized: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): arc or circle
Select object radius is based on: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): arc or circle
Select object to be resized: Select the first object or press ENTER

Length
Forces line and spline segments to have the same length.
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to be resized: Select the first object
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to base size on: Select the second object to add constraint
Valid selection(s): line or spline segment
Select object to be resized: Select the first object or press ENTER

Mirror
Forces lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, and spline segments to become mirror
images about a specified axis. The mirror axis must be part of the current
sketch or a linear part edge.
Select axis to mirror about: Select an object to serve as the mirror axis
Select line, circle, arc, or ellipse (object to be constrained as symmetrical):
Select the first object
Select line, circle, arc, or ellipse (object to be constrained as symmetrical):
Select the second object
Select axis to mirror about: Select an axis or press ENTER

34 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Fix
Forces the endpoint of a sketch segment, or the segment itself, to be fixed in
position. This constraint replaces AMFIXPT.
Select endpoint or sketch segment to lock its position: Select an object

AMANGLE
Creates an angular assembly constraint

Use AMANGLE to create an angular assembly constraint between parts, subas-

semblies, or assemblies. With AMANGLE you can control the angle between
two planes, two vectors, or a combination of a plane and a vector.

before angle constraint after angle constraint

Planes and vectors can be defined by selecting a combination of points, axes,

and planes.

Point
A point is defined by

■ The end of a line

■ The end of a solid edge
■ The center of an arc, sphere, or torus
■ A work point
■ An AutoCAD point
■ A point on a selected surface edge, specified using Nearest Osnap

Axis
An axis is defined by

■ A line or a linear solid edge

■ An axis of an arc, a cylinder, cone, or torus
■ A work axis
■ Two point entities

AMANGLE | 35
 Plane
A plane is defined by

■ A part’s planar face

■ An arc
■ A work plane
■ Two axis entities
■ A point and an axis
■ Three point entities

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D

Constraints ➤ Angle.
Toolbutton Angle
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Angle
Command AMANGLE

Between Two Vectors

Select first set of geometry: Define a vector by selecting geometry
First set = Axis/Vector, (line)
Select first set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second set of geometry: Define another vector by selecting geometry
Second set = Axis/Vector, (line)
Select second set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

Between Two Planes

Select first set of geometry: Define a plane by selecting geometry
First set = Plane/Vector
Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second set of geometry: Define another plane by selecting geometry
Second set = Plane/Vector
Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

36 | Chapter 1 Commands
Between a Plane and a Vector
Select first set of geometry: Define a plane by selecting geometry
First set = Plane/Vector
Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second set of geometry: Define a vector by selecting geometry
Second set = Axis/Vector, (line)
Select second set or [Clear/fAce/Point/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Angle <0>: Specify an angle and press ENTER

Clear
Clears the current selection.

Axis
Switches selection to an axis.

Face
Switches selection to a face.

Point
Switches selection to a point.

Next
Highlights the next available face.

Flip
Flips the direction for the constraint.

Cycle
Cycles through axis, point, line, and plane if they are available for selection.

AMANGLE | 37
 Using the Animated Cursor
Use the animated cursor to automate the selection process when you create
constraints. By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your response
to the command prompts.

Cycling
When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button
to cycle through available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your
selection.

Flipping
When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse button
to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMANNOTE
Creates, adds, moves, or deletes drawing annotations

Use AMANNOTE to create, delete, add, and move annotations associated with
drawing views. AMANNOTE parametrically attaches AutoCAD geometry, text,
and leaders to points in drawing views, including silhouette edges (the point
at which a curved surface turns away from the viewer). When the view is
moved or parts updated, the annotation remains attached to the selected
point.
You can also use AMANNOTE to parametrically attach items such as surface
finish symbols and GD&T symbols to drawing views.
Toolbutton Annotation
Command AMANNOTE

Enter option [Add/Remove/Delete/deTach/Move/Create] <Create>:

Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE You can use the Context Menu to create and move annotations, and
the Desktop Menu to access all options individually.

38 | Chapter 1 Commands
Add
Adds additional objects to an existing annotation.
Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an existing annotation
Select objects to add to annotation.
Select objects: Select an object to add
Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER

Remove
Removes selected objects from an existing annotation.
Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an existing annotation
Select objects to remove from annotation.
Select objects: Select an object to remove
Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER

Delete
Deletes an existing annotation.
Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation

Detach
Detaches an annotation from the view it is associated with, but does not
delete it.
Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation

Move
Moves an annotation to another location, maintaining its association with
the view to which it is attached.
Select annotation by selecting any of its objects: Select an annotation
Annotation location: Specify a new location
Annotation location: Respecify a location or press ENTER

Create
Creates an annotation object from selected geometry and associates it to a
specified view.
Select objects to associate to view.
Select objects: Select geometry
Select objects: Select more geometry or press ENTER to continue
Select point in view to attach annotation: Select a point
Annotation containing n objects attached to view.

AMANNOTE | 39
AMARRAY
Creates rectangular and polar arrays of features on the active part

Use AMARRAY to create a rectangular or polar array of features on the active

part. AMARRAY creates arrays of sketched features, extrusions, revolutions,
sweeps, holes, and combined features.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Array.
Toolbutton Array
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Array
Command AMARRAY

Select feature to be arrayed: Select a feature

Array Dialog Box

The Array dialog box has two tabs—Rectangular and Polar.

Rectangular Tab

40 | Chapter 1 Commands
Columns Along X Axis
Specifies the number of columns and the column spacing for the array.
Rows Along Y Axis
Specifies the number of rows and the row spacing for the array.

feature selected rectangular array

To create an array in the negative X and Y directions, enter negative values

in the Spacing field for rows and columns.

Polar Tab

Number of Instances
Specifies the number of items to create. The selected feature counts as the
first item.
Angle
Specifies the included or incremental angle for the array if it is not full circle.
Enter a positive value to create the array in a counterclockwise direction, or
a negative value to create the array in a clockwise direction.

AMARRAY | 41
 Angle Type
Specifies the type of angle to use.
Full Circle Creates an array through 360 degrees.
Included Angle Creates an array through a specified angle.
Incremental Creates an array in increments using the value specified
Angle for the angle.

135

60

full circle included angle incremental angle

Rotate as Copied
Specifies whether the feature is rotated as it is copied. To array a feature with-
out rotating it, you must first create a work point as a reference point for the
array. The feature is arrayed about the center point of the array relative to this
work point.
If you choose to array the selected feature without rotating it, the following
prompts are displayed:
Select work point, work axis or cylindrical surface for center of array:
Select a work point, work axis, or cylindrical surface
Select work point to be used as reference point: Select a work point

circular face and work point selected feature not rotated

OK
Exits the Array dialog box and creates the array. A rectangular array is auto-
matically created. A polar array issues the following prompt:
Select work point, work axis or cylindrical surface for center of array:
Select a work point, work axis, or cylindrical surface

42 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Selecting a Work Point or a Work Axis
If you select a work point or a work axis, the array is automatically created.
Selecting a Cylindrical Face
If you select a cylindrical face, a work axis is first created through the center
of the face, and then the array is created.

Done
Exits the Array dialog box and the command.

Return to Dialog
Returns to the Array dialog box after an array has been created.

AMASSIGN
Gives a value to a part attribute or adds a new user-defined attribute to the part
definition

Use AMASSIGN to attach information to your parts and subassemblies. You

can change values of existing attributes or create new ones to hold additional
information about the parts in your design.
Toolbutton Assign Attributes
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Assign Attributes
Command AMASSIGN

Assign Attributes Dialog Box

AMASSIGN | 43
 Part/Subassembly Definitions
Lists the part and subassembly definitions that exist in the current drawing.

Value
Specifies the value of the selected attribute. This value can be modified.

Attributes
Specifies the names of the attributes on the current part definition.

Pick
Closes the dialog box temporarily and displays a prompt for selecting a part
or subassembly with your cursor.
Select Part/Subassembly: Select a part or subassembly

After you choose a valid part, the dialog box is displayed with the name of
the part highlighted under Part/Subassembly definitions.

Add
Opens the Add New Attribute dialog box.

Delete
Deletes the currently selected attribute.

Add New Attribute Dialog Box

Attribute Name
Specifies a name for the attribute you want to add.

Attribute Value
Specifies a value for the new attribute.

44 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Column Data Type
Sets the type of data to use for the new attribute.
String
Specifies that the new attribute is character data.
Integer
Specifies that the new attribute is a whole number.
Real
Specifies that the new attribute is a decimal value.

AMASSMPROP
Generates mass properties information about parts and subassemblies

Use AMASSMPROP to calculate mass properties information for parts and sub-
assemblies in an assembly.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤
Mass Properties.
Toolbutton Mass Properties
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Mass Properties
Command AMASSMPROP

Enter an option (parts/subassemblies) [Name/Select] <Select>:

Choose an option

Name
Specify a part or subassembly by name. Using this option, you can select only
one part or subassembly.
Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]: Specify a name or press ENTER

Select
Select parts and subassemblies to include in the mass properties calculations.
You can select as many parts or subassemblies as you like.
Select part and subassembly instances: Select a part or subassembly
Select part and subassembly instances:
Select another part or subassembly or press ENTER

AMASSMPROP | 45
 Assembly Mass Properties Dialog Box

% Error
Specifies the maximum allowable error as a percentage.

Coordinate System
Calculates mass properties values based on the part’s center of gravity, the
current UCS, or the WCS.
Part CG
Reports calculated values relative to the part's center of gravity.
UCS
Reports calculated values relative to the current user coordinate system.
WCS
Reports calculated values in the World Coordinate System.

Material
Displays the Select Material dialog box.

Assembly Units
Specifies the units of measurement used in the assembly.

Mass Units
Specifies the units of measurement used to report the mass of the parts or
subassemblies.

OK
Brings up the Assembly Mass Properties Results dialog box. This dialog box
reports the specified data for the selected part(s).

46 | Chapter 1 Commands
Select Material Dialog Box

Assign
Assigns a material to the currently selected part or subassembly definition.

Part/Subassembly Definition
Lists the part and subassembly definitions you have selected. Highlight a
definition and use Assign to attach a material. Repeat for each definition.

OK
Returns you to the Assembly Mass Properties dialog box.

Assembly Mass Properties Results Dialog Box

AMASSMPROP | 47
 File
Displays the New Massprop File dialog box.

New Massprop File Dialog Box

Save in
Displays the directory tree. Select a directory where the saved file will reside.

File Name
Displays the file name for the mass properties information. You can edit the
default file name.

Save as Type
Specifies the extension for the saved file.

AMAUDIT
Lists externally referenced drawing files that need updating

Use AMAUDIT to determine whether all externally referenced part definitions

are up to date in the current combined part or assembly model. Drawing files,
including nested external references, are listed if they have changed since the
current file was opened or after the last refresh command.
To update an external reference, it must be opened and saved. In the master
drawing file, use AMREFRESH after all externally referenced files are updated.
See “AMREFRESH” on page 298.

48 | Chapter 1 Commands
NOTE If a changed part is externally referenced to a subassembly that is exter-
nally referenced to an assembly, AMAUDIT reports the drawing file that has
changed and the subassembly that needs updating. Performing AMREFRESH on
the assembly has no effect until the subassembly is opened and saved.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤

Audit.
Toolbutton Audit External Refs
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Audit
Command AMAUDIT

If no out-of-date part definitions are found, an AutoCAD Message dialog box

is displayed, indicating that all files are up to date. If out-of-date part defini-
tions are found, the Check External References dialog box is displayed.

Check External References Dialog Box

Changed Files
Displays the external files that have changed in the current assembly.

Files to Update
Displays the files that must be updated in order. For information about
dependencies, select a file from this list, and click Info.

Info
Provides information about dependencies for the selected file. Opens the
Dependent External References dialog box.

AMAUDIT | 49
 Dependent External References Dialog Box

Dependent Files
Displays the files that are dependent on the selected file.

AMAUGMENT
Creates augmented lines from surface edges, internal trim lines, and display lines

An augmented line has a vector at every point in the line. Using AMAUGMENT
to create an augmented line on a surface does not change the surface. Aug-
mented lines are displayed on the current layer and in the current color.
You can use augmented lines to solve problems in positioning and orienting
surfaces. For example, you can position the vectors of an augmented line to
generate a helical surface.
The capabilities of AMAUGMENT are critical in the following manufacturing
applications:

■ Creating a cutter path for 4- and 5-axis milling

■ Creating a cutter path for 4- and 5-axis cutting, such as laser, water jet, or
wire electrodischarge machining (EDM)
■ Creating a 5-axis coordinate measuring machine (CMM) path for quality
assurance testing of manufactured parts or tooling

In surface modeling, use augmented lines to force tangency at surface edges

and to produce single rail sweeps, using the vectors to orient the cross section.
Toolbutton Augmented Line
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Augmented Lines
Command AMAUGMENT

50 | Chapter 1 Commands
Angle=0 Distance=0.0000 Spacing=Optimal
Select surface wire or [Angle/Distance/Spacing]: Select a surface wire
Select surface wire or [Angle/Distance/Spacing]:
Choose an option, select another wire, or press ENTER

Select Surface Wire

Creates augmented lines from the surface wires you select.
Valid input for surface wires is all surface edges, the actual base surface edges,
internal trim edges, and surface display U and V lines.

before AMAUGMENT after AMAUGMENT

The portion of the surface edge contained between any two nodes deter-
mines the limits of the selected edge.

Angle
Controls the angle of the vectors of the augmented line.
Enter an angle between 0 and 360 degrees to rotate the vectors. Rotation
occurs in a plane normal to the surface trim line and parallel to each vector.
The default setting for the angle of the vectors is 0, which is normal to the
surface.

45 degree 90 degrees

Using AMAUGMENT to control the angle of the vectors, you can create custom
augmented lines to build new surfaces at specific angles to other surfaces.

AMAUGMENT | 51
 Distance
Offsets the augmented line from the edge to the interior of the surface. A neg-
ative distance offsets the augmented line from the interior of the surface.

positive distance negative distance

Distance is a true 3D value measured along the surface.

Spacing
Controls the number of vertices in the augmented line. To increase or
decrease the number of vectors in the augmented line, increase or decrease
the number of vertices.
Optimal
Determines the minimum number of vertices required on the augmented
line to keep the accuracy within the current system tolerance setting.
Vertices
Establishes a specific number of vertices, equally spaced along an augmented
line.
Vertices <10>: Enter a value or press ENTER

Step
Separates vertices along the contour of the augmented line by the distance
you enter. Use to control placement of the vectors in the augmented line.
Step<1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER

52 | Chapter 1 Commands
AMAUTODIM
Automatically dimensions parts in Drawing mode

Use AMAUTODIM to automatically dimension parts in Drawing mode.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Automatic
Dimensioning.
Toolbutton Automatic Dimensioning
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Automatic Dimensioning
Command AMAUTODIM

The Automatic Dimensioning dialog box opens, where you can set up the
type of dimensions to create.

Automatic Dimensioning Dialog Box

Controls the settings for automatic dimensioning. The dialog box has three
tabs: Parallel, Ordinate, and Shaft/Symmetric.

Parallel Tab

Type
Controls the type of dimension to create.
Baseline Creates baseline dimensions.
Chain Creates chain dimensions.
Both Axes
Creates both horizontal and vertical dimensions.

AMAUTODIM | 53
 Rearrange in New Style
Rearranges existing dimensions.
Select Additional Contour
Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning.
Display Dim Dialog
Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances
and fit symbols to dimensions.

Ordinate Tab

Type
Controls the type of dimension to create.
Ordinate Creates ordinate dimensions and varies leader lengths, to
align dimension text.
Equal Leader Creates ordinate dimensions with equal leader lengths.
Length
Both Axes
Creates both horizontal and vertical dimensions.
Rearrange in New Style
Rearranges existing dimensions.
Select Additional Contour
Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning.
Display Dim Dialog
Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances
and fit symbols to dimensions.

54 | Chapter 1 Commands
Shaft/Symmetric Tab

Type
Controls the type of dimension to create.
Full Shaft Creates diameter dimensions for shafts and cylindrical
parts.
Symmetric Creates dimensions for symmetrical parts.
Place Dimensions Inside Contour
Forces dimensions inside the contours of a shaft or cylindrical part.
Rearrange in New Style
Rearranges existing dimensions.
Select Additional Contour
Allows additional edges to be selected for dimensioning.
Display Dim Dialog
Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box, where you can add tolerances
and fit symbols to dimensions.

OK
Closes the dialog box and continues on the command line.
Select entities: Specify an object to dimension
Select entities: Specify another object to dimension
First extension line origin: Specify the first extension line origin
Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] <Options>:
Choose an option or specify a location
Starting point for next extension line:
Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

Options
Opens the PowerDim Options dialog box.

AMAUTODIM | 55
 Pick Objects
Allows selection of additional part edges.
Select object: Specify an edge
Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] <Options>:
Choose an option or specify a location
Starting point for next extension line:
Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

PowerDim Options Dialog Box

Power
Creates power dimensions.

Horizontal
Creates horizontal dimensions.

Vertical
Creates vertical dimensions.

Aligned
Creates aligned dimensions.

Rotated
Creates rotated dimensions.

Distance Snap
Controls the settings for the distance snap used when dimensions are
created.
Use Distance Snap
Controls whether a distance snap is used.
Distance
Specifies the value for the distance snap.

56 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Pick Object Contour
Allows selection of additional part edges.
Select object: Specify an edge
Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] <Options>:
Choose an option or specify a location
Starting point for next extension line:
Specify the start point for another dimension, or press ENTER

AMBALLOON
Creates and places balloons

Use AMBALLOON to attach associative balloon callouts to part references in

your drawing. You can control the display of balloons by modifying the
symbol standards you have set in your drawing. Use AMSYMSTD to control
symbol standards.
Typically, balloons are created in Drawing mode, but you can also create
them in Model mode.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤
Balloon.
Toolbutton Balloon
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Balloon
Command AMBALLOON

Select balloon’s operation: [Auto/Collect/Manual/One/Renumber] <Auto>:

Choose an option to create a balloon, or press ENTER

Collect
Places balloons for selected part references together and attaches them to an
existing balloon.
Select pick object: Select the part references
Select pick object: Press ENTER
Select balloon: [New]: Enter n or select a balloon

AMBALLOON | 57
 New
Creates a new balloon.

Manual
Creates a new part reference block at a specified point and attaches a balloon.
Select point [Block/Copy/Reference]: Choose an option or specify a point

The Part Ref Attributes dialog box opens. See “AMPARTREF” on page 262 for
information about the dialog box options.
Select position: Specify a point to place the new part reference
Select a start point of balloon: Specify a start point for the balloon leader
Next Point: Specify a point for the end of the first leader segment
Next Point: Specify a point for the next leader segment end, or press ENTER

Block
Attaches a balloon to a specified block reference.
Select block reference: Specify a block

Copy
Creates a copy of an existing part reference and attaches a balloon.
Select reference to make a copy: Specify an existing part reference

Reference
Creates a part reference that references another part reference or a balloon.
Select reference: Specify an existing part reference or balloon

58 | Chapter 1 Commands
One
Places a single balloon.
Select pick object: Select a part reference
Select a start point of balloon: Specify a start point for the balloon leader
Next Point: Specify a point for the end of the first leader segment
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment end, or press ENTER
Select pick object: Select another part reference, or press ENTER

Auto
Places and aligns balloons for selected part references.
Select pick object: Select part references
Select pick object: Select additional part references, or press ENTER to continue
Align Horizontal/<Vertical>: Choose an option or specify a point

vertically and horizontally aligned balloons

Renumber
Renumbers selected balloons.
Enter starting item number: <1>: Specify a number
Enter increment: <1>: Specify an increment
Select balloon: Specify a balloon
Select balloon: Specify another balloon or press ENTER

AMBALLOON | 59
AMBASICPLANES
Creates static work planes based on top, front, and side views of a specified point

Use AMBASICPLANES to create static work planes based on the top, front, and
side views of a specified point. Basic planes are useful when you are creating
an initial feature for a part in a new drawing. AMBASICPLANES creates a new
part definition before the work planes are placed.
Toolbutton Create Basic Work Planes
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Basic 3D Work Planes
Command AMBASICPLANES

Pick origin: Specify a point

AMBLDFEATNM
Changes the Browser feature names to the localized language

Use AMBLDFEATNM to display features listed in the Browser in a localized lan-

guage. For example, if you load an English version and then a German version,
this command resets the Browser feature names to German.
Command AMBLDFEATNM

AMBLEND
Creates a surface between two, three, or four wires or surfaces

AMBLEND creates a surface that fits smoothly between two to four wires. The
new surface is tangent to each wire and effectively joins them.
You can use AMBLEND to solve difficulties when surfacing 3D models that
have little geometry. AMBLEND accepts augmented line input to control the
tangency of the new surface at its edge. Given only the edges of the area to
be surfaced, AMBLEND creates a new, blended surface.

60 | Chapter 1 Commands
 The following objects are valid wires:

■ Base surface edges

■ Trimmed surface edges, including interior surface edges, such as the edges
of a hole
■ Arcs
■ Augmented lines, circles, and ellipses
■ Lines, polylines, and splines

You must select at least two wires. Select surfaces on the edges where you
want the new blended surface created.

To create a blended surface from three objects, select two objects that face
each other, then select the third object.

1 2

To create a blended surface from four objects, select edges of surfaces in non-
adjacent pairs.
2
4

If the selected wires are surface edges or augmented lines, then AMBLEND
maintains the tangency defined by the surface normals or augmented line
vectors in the blended surface.
If the selected wires are arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, polylines, or splines,
AMBLEND doesn’t explicitly control the tangency along the edge of the
blended surface.

AMBLEND | 61
 If the selected wires are polylines, AMBLEND fits the blended surface between
them based on the current settings of the AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG system
variables.
Toolbutton Blended Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Blend
Command AMBLEND

Select first wire: Select the first wire

Select second wire: Select the second wire
Select third wire [Weights]: Choose an option, select a third wire, or press ENTER
Select fourth wire [Weights]:
Choose an option, select a fourth wire, or press ENTER

Weights
Specifies the tangency of the blended surface to the original augmented lines
or surfaces. This option is available only if you select wires from existing
surfaces.
First weight <1.0000>: Enter a value
Second weight <1.0000>: Enter a value

Using the same value for the first and second weights produces a blended sur-
face that follows the tangents of the input wires at an equal distance. Using
different values produces a blended surface that follows the tangent of one
wire farther than the other.

AMBOM
Creates or edits a bill of materials database for generating parts lists

Use AMBOM to create or edit a bill of materials (BOM) database. The BOM
database is a spreadsheet that lists all the parts and subassemblies in your
assembly file in the order in which they were created or instanced in your
drawing.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤
BOM Database.
Toolbutton Edit BOM Database
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ BOM Database
Command AMBOM

62 | Chapter 1 Commands
BOM Dialog Box

Use the toolbuttons at the top of the BOM dialog box to perform the tasks
described below.

Print
Prints the database.

Add Parts
Adds parts to the database. This option is available in Model mode only.
Use this option when you have added or created new parts since generating
a BOM database. Mechanical Desktop scans your drawing and adds the new
parts to your BOM.
Use this option when you have deleted a part from the database and you
need to add it again.

Delete Column
Deletes the current column. A message requests confirmation. Item,
Description, and Qty (Count) columns cannot be deleted.

Insert Column
Inserts a column in front of the current column and opens the BOM Properties
dialog box. The new column is highlighted. Double-click the Column, Cap-
tion, and Width fields to edit the default values.

Add Item
Adds a row at the end of the database. Double-click the columns in the BOM
dialog box to enter values.

AMBOM | 63
 Insert Item
Inserts a row above the current row. Double-click the columns in the BOM
dialog box to enter values.

Delete Item
Deletes the current row. A message requests confirmation.

Standard Properties
Opens the BOM Properties dialog box used to edit BOM, balloon, and parts list
properties for the standards you are using in your drawing. See “AMSYMSTD”
on page 354.

Assembly Properties
Opens the Assembly Properties dialog box, used to add or change properties
for the assemblies in your drawing.

BOM Representation
Opens the BOM Representation dialog box, used to control the appearance
of part instances in subassemblies.

Sort
Sorts the database.

Insert Parts List

Inserts a parts list into your drawing. See “AMPARTLIST” on page 258.

Ballooning
Creates balloons in your drawing. See “AMBALLOON” on page 57.

Export
Opens the Export dialog box. You can export data in a variety of formats.

Import
Opens the Import dialog box. You can import data in a variety of formats.

Set Values
Opens the Set Values dialog box, used to control the values for each column
in the database.

OK
Closes the BOM dialog box and saves the changes.

64 | Chapter 1 Commands
Cancel
Closes the BOM dialog box without saving changes.

Apply
Applies the changes made in the BOM dialog box and leaves the dialog box
open.

BOM Properties Dialog Box

Column
Lists the columns defined in the BOM database. Double-click a column name
to change its value. Column names in red cannot be edited.

Caption
Lists the captions to be used for the columns in the BOM and the parts list.
Double-click a caption to change it.

Width
Lists the widths of the columns. Double-click to edit.

Equivalents
Lists equivalent attribute names for columns. Double click to edit.

AMBOM | 65
 Data Type
Determines the type of data to use for the highlighted column. You may spec-
ify text, integer, or real data types.

Size
Sets the maximum character size of data.

Precision
Sets the decimal place precision for data. Available only if the data type is real.

Caption Alignment
Provides options for left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered captions.

Data Alignment
Provides options for left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered data.

Modify
Provides access to the Balloon Properties and Properties for ANSI dialog
boxes.

Default
Resets all values to the default values.

BOM Representation Dialog Box

Expanded
Lists all instances of parts in one field, whether they are in subassemblies or
the main assembly.

Structured
Lists instances separately. Part instances in the main assembly are listed in
one field. Instances that are part of a subassembly are listed in their own field
and numbered using a specified separator.

66 | Chapter 1 Commands
Separator
Specifies the separator to use when structuring a BOM.

Use Assembly Path

Lists part instances that belong to a subassembly when it is expanded in the
BOM dialog box.

Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Standard Balloon
Controls the type of balloon to use. Available types are

■ Circular
■ Open
■ Polygon
■ Circular 2 Text
■ Linear

AMBOM | 67
 Text Height
Sets the text height for the balloon text.
Color
Sets the color of the balloon.

Use Custom Block

Uses a user-defined block as the balloon type.
Leader to Center of User Block
Specifies that the leader is attached to the center of the user-defined block.
Leader to Extents of User Block
Specifies that the leader is attached to the extents of the user-defined block.

Arrow Type
Sets the type of arrow for the balloon leader.

Use Auxiliary Arrow Type

Sets the type of arrow for auxiliary leaders.

Columns to Display
Determines the information that will be displayed in the balloon.

Default
Resets values to the default values.

Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating balloons.

Properties for ANSI Dialog Box

The Properties for ANSI dialog box controls Parts List settings. It contains two
tabs, Standard and Custom Blocks.

68 | Chapter 1 Commands
Standard Tab

Parts List Heading

Controls the settings for parts list headings.
Insert Heading Controls whether a heading is applied to the parts list
and how it is formatted. You can place the heading at the
top or bottom of the parts list.
Heading Gap Controls the size of the gap between the parts list and the
heading.
Text Color Controls the color of the heading text.
Text Height Controls the height of the heading text.
Title Controls whether a title is used.
Attach Point
Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing.
Frame Color
Controls the color of the parts list frame.
Row Gap
Controls the spacing between rows.
Line Spacing
Controls the spacing between lines in a row.

AMBOM | 69
 Wrap Text
Controls whether text is wrapped to fit in the columns of the parts list.
Printer Setup
Opens the Printer Setup dialog box.
Columns to Display
Determines which columns are displayed in the parts list.
Default
Resets all values to the default values.
Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Custom Blocks Tab

Use Custom Block for Parts List

Specifies whether a custom block is used for a parts list.
Block Name Scheme
Specifies the name of the custom block to use.
Parts List Heading
Controls whether a parts list heading is used in the custom block.

70 | Chapter 1 Commands
Attach Point
Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing.
Filter Empty References
Filters references that are not attached to a part from the parts list.
Evaluate dsk-File
Reads a specified data file containing custom block information.
Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Margins
Sets values for the printer margins and specifies whether the parts list is cen-
tered on the page.

Print
Specifies whether captions and headings are printed.

Fonts Tab
Controls the fonts to use for the title, heading, and body of the parts list.

AMBOM | 71
 Line Tab
Controls the line thicknesses to use in the parts list.

Printer
Opens the Microsoft® Windows® Print Setup dialog box.

Preview
Opens the Preview dialog box.

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Preview Dialog Box

Previous
Displays the previous parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Next
Displays the next parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Close
Closes the dialog box.

72 | Chapter 1 Commands
Assembly Properties Dialog Box

Name
By default, displays the drawing name. Double-click in the white field to
specify a name for your assembly.

Material
Specifies a material.

Note
Specifies any notes you want assigned to the assembly.

Vendor
Specifies a vendor name.

BOM Name
Specifies a name for the bill of material to associate with this assembly. By
default, the active assembly name is displayed.

AMBOM | 73
 Export Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder for the BOM table.

File Name
Specifies the file name for the BOM table.

Save as Type
Specifies the data type. Supported types are Microsoft® Access, Microsoft®
Excel, dBase® III, dBase® IV, Microsoft® FoxPro, and Format Text.

Table Name
Specifies the name for the exported table.

Import Dialog Box

74 | Chapter 1 Commands
Look in
Specifies the folder to look in for the BOM table.

File Name
Specifies the file name for the BOM table.

Files of Type
Specifies the data type. Supported types are Microsoft Access, Microsoft Excel,
dBase III, dBase IV, Microsoft FoxPro, and Format Text.

Table Name
Specifies the table name.

Set Values Dialog Box

Column
Selects a column to modify.

Increment
Specifies the increment for columns.

Add
Adds a column to the database.

Start Value
Specifies a start value. If the data is numeric, specify a start value. If the data
is text, specify a value.

Step
Specifies the increment for increasing the start value. This field is not available
if the column being edited contains a text data type.

AMBOM | 75
AMBREAK
Breaks one surface into two surfaces along a specified edge

Use AMBREAK to split a surface by breaking it perpendicular to a selected edge.

Selecting a point on the V edge causes a break along a U line.
AMBREAK displays a preview of the break, using the color defined by the
GRIPCOLOR system variable. The command line indicates the location of the
break, expressed as a percentage along the edge of the surface.
Breaking a surface at every C1 tangency makes C2-continuous surfaces. A
surface may or may not contain multiple C1 tangencies.
Toolbutton Break Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Break
Command AMBREAK

Select surface: Select a surface

(Percent = n%)
Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] <break u>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

The C1 Tangents option is not displayed if you select a surface that has no
C1 discontinuity.

Break U, Break V, Break C1 Tangents

Accepts the previewed break.

C1
Previews the break in the surface where there is a C1 discontinuity.
Enter an option [U/V] <break c1 tangents>: Choose an option

Break C1 Tangents
Breaks the surface at the previewed C1 tangency.

C1 tangent previewed surface broken

76 | Chapter 1 Commands
U
Previews the surface break along the U line and returns to the prompt:
Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] <break u>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

U line previewed surface broken

Press ENTER to break the surface along the U line instead of at the C1 tangent.
V
Previews the surface break along the V line and returns to the prompt:
Enter an option [C1 tangents/Flip/Reposition] <break v>:
Enter an option or press ENTER

V line previewed surface broken

Press ENTER to break the surface along the V line instead of at the C1 tangent.

Flip
Flips the direction of the break shown in the preview. For example, if the
preview shows a break in the V direction, this option changes it to the U
direction.
One of the following prompts is displayed, depending on the previewed
direction of the break:
Enter an option [Flip/Reposition] <break u>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter an option [Flip/Reposition] <break v>: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMBREAK | 77
 Reposition
Changes the location of the break. One of the following prompts is dis-
played, depending on the previewed direction of the break:
Enter U break percentage or [Specify U break] <n%>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter V break percentage or [Specify U break] <n%>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Specify U (V) Break

Use this option to select another location.
Percentage
Use this option to specify a new percentage.

AMBREAKLINE
Creates a break line sketch to use for a breakout section drawing view

Use AMBREAKLINE to define a break line for a breakout section drawing view.
The break line may be created on a part face or a work plane.

break line sketch breakout drawing view

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch

Solving ➤ Break Line.
Toolbutton Break Line
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Break Line
Command AMBREAKLINE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects

Select objects for sketch: Select more objects or press ENTER

78 | Chapter 1 Commands
AMBROWSER
Controls the display of the Desktop Browser

Use AMBROWSER to control the display of the Desktop Browser.

Toolbutton Toggle Browser
Desktop Menu View ➤ Display ➤ Desktop Browser
Command AMBROWSER

Desktop browser? [ON/OFf] <ON>:

Choose an option to control the Browser display

AMBROWSERFONT
Changes the text font and size used by the Desktop Browser

Use AMBROWSERFONT to control the type and size of the font used by the
Desktop Browser.
Browser Click the Options button.
Toolbutton Options
Desktop Menu Assist ➤ Desktop Options
Command AMBROWSERFONT

In the Browser, menu, and toolbutton methods, select the Desktop tab and
choose Browser Font to open the Font dialog box. If you use the command
line, the Font dialog box opens automatically.

AMBROWSER | 79
 Font Dialog Box

Font
Defines the typeface for the text.

Font Style
Defines a regular, bold, italic, or bold italic text style.

Size
Defines how large the text will be.

Effects
Places a line through the text or under the text.

Color
Defines the color of the text in the Browser.

Sample
Displays an example of the font, style, size, color, and effects you have chosen
for the Browser text.

Script
Offers a Western script option.

80 | Chapter 1 Commands
AMCAPTUREUCS
Saves the current UCS and sketch plane

Use AMCAPTUREUCS to save the current UCS and sketch plane. A UCS block
is created containing the information about the UCS and its sketch plane.
The X axis is indicated by a single arrow, the Y axis by a double arrow, and
the Z axis by a triple arrow.

Use AMRESTOREUCS to recover the saved information.

Toolbutton Capture UCS
Desktop Menu Assist ➤ Capture 3D UCS
Command AMCAPTUREUCS

AMCATALOG
Maintains a catalog of all standard parts, both local and external, being used in a
combined part file or an assembly file

Use AMCATALOG to attach external parts to a part or an assembly drawing, to

localize external parts, to create additional part instances in the assembly,
and to detach parts from the drawing.

Part Modeling Environment

In the Part Modeling environment, use AMCATALOG to attach the part files
that are to be used as toolbodies for combined parts. The catalog is available
only if a base part already exists in the part drawing.
Browser Click the Catalog icon.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click, and choose Catalog.
Toolbutton Part Catalog
Desktop Menu Toolbody ➤ Catalog
Command AMCATALOG

AMCAPTUREUCS | 81
 Part Catalog Dialog Box
The Part Catalog dialog box contains two tabs, External and All.
External Tab
Lists the external part definitions found in specified directories. By default,
the directory where you installed Mechanical Desktop is displayed. Use this
tab to control directories, to browse for files, to sort listed files, or to instance,
rename, and replace external definitions.

Part Definitions Lists all the external part files in the current working
directory. Files that are already attached to the drawing
have a white background; unreferenced files have a dark
gray background. Right-click an attached file to display
the menu, to instance, rename, replace, localize, or
detach the file. Right-click an unreferenced file to display
the menu to attach the file to the current drawing, to sort
drawings alphabetically or chronologically, or to view
the attached drawings only.
Directories Lists all attached directories. Right-click in this window
to display the menu to attach and detach directories,
browse for drawing files, and detach all directories.

82 | Chapter 1 Commands
Preview Displays a preview of the highlighted drawing. The
drawing file and its path are displayed in the field
immediately below the Preview window.
Ground Base Part Displays the name of the grounded base part.
All Tab
Lists all externally referenced and localized part definitions. Use this tab to
localize or externalize part definitions, create additional instances, and copy
part definitions.

External Lists all externally referenced toolbody definitions.

Toolbody Right-click a part definition to display the menu to
Definitions instance, rename, replace, localize, unlock, or detach the
definition. Right-click the window background to
display the menu to sort definitions, purge all locks, or
view only the attached definitions.
Local Toolbody Lists all localized part definitions. Right-click a definition
Definitions to display the menu to instance, copy, rename, replace,
externalize, or remove the definition from the drawing.
Ground Base Part Displays the name of the grounded base part.

AMCATALOG | 83
 External When an external definition is highlighted under
Definition External Toolbody Definitions, the path for the
Found At definition is displayed.
Browse Opens the Locate External Definition dialog box.
Save Path Saves the path for the external definition.
Return to Dialog
Determines whether to return to the Part Catalog dialog box after performing
a function.
OK
Closes the Part Catalog dialog box.

Assembly Modeling Environment

Use AMCATALOG in the Assembly Modeling Environment to create assemblies
of externally referenced and localized parts.
Browser Click the Assembly Catalog icon.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Catalog.
Toolbutton Assembly Catalog
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Catalog
Command AMCATALOG

Assembly Catalog Dialog Box

The Assembly Catalog dialog box contains two tabs, External and All.
External Tab
Lists the external part and subassembly definitions found in specified direc-
tories. By default, the directory where you installed Mechanical Desktop is
displayed. Use this tab to control directories, to browse for files, to sort listed
files, or to instance, rename, or replace external definitions.

84 | Chapter 1 Commands
Part and Lists all the external drawing files in the current working
Subassembly directory. Files that are already attached to the drawing
Definitions have a white background; unreferenced files have a gray
background. Right-click an attached file to display the
menu to instance, rename, replace, localize, or detach the
file. Right-click an unreferenced file to display the menu
to attach the file to the current drawing, to sort drawings
alphabetically or chronologically, or to view the attached
drawings only.
Directories Lists all attached directories. Right-click in this window to
display the menu to attach and detach directories, browse
for drawing files, or detach all directories.
Preview Displays a preview of the highlighted drawing. The
drawing file and its path are displayed in the field
immediately below the Preview window.
Active Displays the name of the active assembly.
Assembly

AMCATALOG | 85
 All Tab
Lists all externally referenced and localized part and subassembly definitions.
Use this tab to localize or externalize part and subassembly definitions, create
additional instances, or copy part definitions.

External Lists all externally referenced part and subassembly

Assembly definitions. Right-click a part or subassembly definition
Definitions to display the menu to instance, rename, replace,
localize, unlock, or detach the definition. Right-click the
window background to sort definitions, purge all locks,
or view only the attached definitions.
Local Assembly Lists all localized part and subassembly definitions.
Definitions Right-click a definition to display the menu to instance,
copy, rename, replace, externalize, or remove the
definition from the drawing.
External When an external definition is highlighted under
Definition External Assembly Definitions, the path for the
Found At definition is displayed.
Browse Opens the Locate External Definition dialog box.
Save Path Saves the path for the external definition.

86 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Return to Dialog
Determines whether to return to the Assembly Catalog dialog box after
performing a function.
OK
Closes the Assembly Catalog dialog box.

Locate External Definition Dialog Box

Look in
Specifies the folder to display.

File Name
Specifies the name of the external file to open.

Files of Type
Specifies the file type to display.

AMCENLINE
Creates a parametric centerline in Drawing mode

Use AMCENLINE in Drawing mode to create a centerline and center marks

through selected circles and arcs. The centerline is created on the current
layer and is parametrically attached to the geometry it references.
You can create a centerline between

■ Two edges
■ Along the midpoint of an edge
■ At the center of a circle or arc

AMCENLINE | 87
 AMCENLINE uses the system variables AMCLGAP, AMCLOSHT, and AMCLCM to
determine the size of the centermark and centerlines. Center mark size
remains fixed throughout updates unless AMCLPAR is turned on.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation
➤ Centerline.
Toolbutton Centerline
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤Annotation ➤ Centerline
Command AMCENLINE

Select Edge: Select an edge, circle, or arc

Select mirrored edge or <RETURN>:
Select another edge, circle, or arc, or press ENTER

Single Edge
If only one edge is selected, a centerline is created perpendicular to the
selected linear edge through the midpoint. Trim the start and endpoints of
the centerline.
Select first trim point: Specify a start point for the centerline
Select second trim point: Specify an endpoint for the centerline

midpoint of linear trimmed

edge selected centerline

Single Circle or Arc

If only one circle or arc is selected, a center mark is created at the center of
the circle or arc.
circle selected centerline created

88 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Mirrored Edge
Creates the centerline along the mirror line between two selected edges or
arcs. Trims the centerline to specified start and endpoints.
Select first trim point: Specify a start point for the centerline
Select second trim point: Specify an endpoint for the centerline

2 trimmed centerline

AMCHAMFER
Creates a chamfer on the selected edge(s) of the active part

Use AMCHAMFER to create bevelled edges on your parts. If you select an edge
that ends at a point where two edges join and are continuously tangent, the
chamfer automatically extends until it reaches a noncontinuous end.
Multiple chamfers created at the same time become a single feature
controlled by one chamfer definition.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Chamfer.
Toolbutton Chamfer
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Chamfer
Command AMCHAMFER

AMCHAMFER | 89
 Chamfer Feature Dialog Box

Operation
Determines the method for creating the chamfer.
Equal Distance
Creates a chamfer at an equal distance along two surfaces, meeting at the
selected edge. Uses the Distance1 value in the Parameters section of the dialog
box.
Select the edge to chamfer: Select an edge
Select the edge to chamfer: Select another edge or press ENTER

distance 1

distance 1

Two Distances
Creates a chamfer designated by values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields
in the Parameters section of the dialog box.
Select edge to chamfer: Select an edge
Press <ENTER> to continue: Press ENTER
Apply distance 1 to highlighted face.
Enter an option [Next/Accept] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face or press ENTER

90 | Chapter 1 Commands
 distance 2

distance 1

Distance x Angle
Creates a chamfer defined by values in the Distance1 and Angle fields in the
Parameters section of the dialog box.
Select edge to chamfer: Select an edge
Press <ENTER> to continue: Press ENTER
Apply angle value to highlighted face.
Enter an option [Next/Accept] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face or press ENTER

distance 1
angle

Parameters
Sets the values used to create the chamfer.
Distance1
Sets the first distance for the chamfer.
Distance2
Sets the second distance for the chamfer.
Angle
Sets the angle for the chamfer.

Return to Dialog
Determines whether or not the Chamfer Feature dialog box is displayed after
the chamfer has been created.

OK
Closes the Chamfer Feature dialog box and continues AMCHAMFER on the
command line.

AMCHAMFER | 91
AMCHECKFIT
Measures the distance between objects

Use AMCHECKFIT to measure the minimum 3D distance and maximum 3D

deviation between two wires or between a wire and a surface. You can examine,
point by point, the distance from every point in a polyline to a selected wire
or surface.
Distance is important in checking product design and data for CMM (Coor-
dinate Measuring Machine) work; it is used in all types of tooling design.
AMCHECKFIT makes wire-to-wire or wire-to-surface comparisons of

■ Original 3D polyline to a spline version made with fewer control points

■ Original input lines to the new surface in order to determine maximum
tolerances for conforming to the specification
■ Digitized 3D input from a scanned physical model to the original mathe-
matical surface model

Valid input for a check or target wire is an arc, augmented line, ellipse, point,
polyline, or spline. Valid surface input is a surface edge or a surface U or V
display line.
Toolbutton Check Fit
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Utilities ➤ Check Fit
Command AMCHECKFIT

Select check wires: Select a wire

Select check wires: Select another wire or press ENTER
Select target wire or surface: Select a target wire or surface
Minimum distance = n, Maximum distance = n
(Scale = 1.0000)
Enter an option [Graph/Scale/Table] <exit>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Finding the Distance Between Two Lines

To calculate the distance between two wire objects, AMCHECKFIT first converts
arcs or splines to polylines at the current tolerance setting. Then it compares
the vertices of the check wire with the vertices and linear transition between
vertices of the target wire.

92 | Chapter 1 Commands
 It builds a table of minimum corresponding values, and then displays the
relative position of the minimum and maximum corresponding values using
temporary lines. The temporary lines are displayed using the color defined
by the GRIPHOT variable.

check wire

target wire temporary lines displayed

The resulting maximum distance is actually the maximum of the minimums,

or the maximum deviation between the two objects.

Finding Distance Between a Line and a Surface

To calculate the distance between a wire object and a surface, AMCHECKFIT
first converts an arc or spline to a polyline at the current tolerance setting.
Then it compares the corresponding values between each polyline vertex and
the minimum distance to a normal surface vertex.
AMCHECKFIT then calculates a table of minimum values and displays the
relative position of the minimum and maximum corresponding values with
temporary lines.

surface

check wire temporary lines displayed

Graph
Displays the relative distances between check and target objects in the form
of a graph overlaid on the drawing. The actual distances measured between
vertices are scaled by a specified factor to produce the temporary lines of the
graph. The minimum and maximum distances are controlled by the GRIPHOT
color; all other lines are controlled by GRIPCOLOR.

Scale
Changes the scale factor used to display temporary lines.
Scale <1.0000>: Enter a value or press ENTER

AMCHECKFIT | 93
 Table
Displays the Check Point Data dialog box, which lists vertices and the mini-
mum 3D distance and maximum 3D deviation between two wires or between
a wire and a surface.

Check Point Data Dialog Box

Vertex
Lists the vertices found on the check wire.

Differences
Lists the distances between check wire vertices and target object vertices.

Check Entity
Lists the X, Y, Z coordinates of a selected check wire vertex.

Target Entity
Lists the X, Y, Z coordinates of the vertex on the target object that corresponds
to the selected check wire vertex.

Show
Hides the dialog box and shows temporary lines for the vertices you have
selected.
ENTER to continue: Press ENTER to return to the dialog box

Clear All
Unselects all vertices that you have highlighted.

94 | Chapter 1 Commands
AMCOMBINE
Combines the active base part with another parametric part, called the toolbody

Use AMCOMBINE to create a single, complex part from two or more parts,
using parametric Boolean operations. The active part is called the base part,
and the part being combined with the base part is called the toolbody. You
can combine as many toolbodies with the base part as you need. The tool-
body is nested below a Combine icon that is created in the Desktop Browser.

toolbody

base part

Toolbodies can also be combined with other toolbodies. These parts are
called nested toolbodies. You cannot combine a part with an instance of itself.
After the combined part has been created, you can edit the base part and any
of the toolbodies or any of the 3D constraints you have applied to position
the parts.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Combine.
Toolbutton Combine
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Combine
Command AMCOMBINE

Enter parametric boolean operation [Cut/Intersect/Join] <Cut>:

Choose an option

Cut
Cuts material from a base part, using a selected toolbody.
Select part (toolbody) to use for cutting: Select a part

AMCOMBINE | 95
 Join
Joins a selected toolbody to a selected part.
Select part (toolbody) to be joined: Select a part

Intersect
Creates a new part from the intersecting volume of a base part and a toolbody.
Select part (toolbody) to use for intersecting: Select a part

AMCOPYFEAT
Copies sketched and hole features, feature sets, or new features within the same part or
from one part to another

Use AMCOPYFEAT to copy a selected feature within the same part or from one
part to another. The copied feature will be oriented to the current sketch
plane. You can rotate or flip the feature once you have specified its location.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Copy Feat.
Toolbutton Copy Feature
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Copy
Command AMCOPYFEAT

Select feature: Select feature to copy

Sketched Features
Parameters=Independent
Select location [Parameters]:
Enter p to change parameters or specify a point to place the copied feature
Parameters=Independent
Select location [Parameters/Rotate/Flip]:
Specify a new location, choose an option, or press ENTER

selected feature
feature copied and rotated

96 | Chapter 1 Commands
 Hole Features
Parameters=Independent
Select location [Parameters]:
Enter p to change parameters or specify a point to place the copied feature
Select location [Parameters]:
Specify a new location, choose an option, or press ENTER

selected feature active part copied feature

Parameters
Toggles between independent and dependent features.
Rotate
Changes the rotation of the copied feature.
Flip
Flips the orientation of the copied feature.
Select Location
Selects the location for the copied feature. This prompt remains active until
you press ENTER, allowing you to fine tune the placement of the feature.

AMCOPYIN
Places an external part or assembly in the current drawing

Use AMCOPYIN to place an external part or assembly in the current drawing

with the File to Load dialog box. AMCOPYIN localizes the external part or
assembly, maintaining parametric relationships.
If you are working in a part file that already contains a part, the new localized
part automatically becomes an unconsumed toolbody. If you are working in
an assembly file, and the new localized assembly has external references,
they are maintained. Scenes and drawing views are not imported.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Copy In.
Toolbutton Input Part Definition
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Copy In
Command AMCOPYIN

AMCOPYIN | 97
 File to Load Dialog Box

Look in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the file name of the selected file.

Files of Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

Open
Selects the new part to place in the current open file.

Find File
Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. The Browse tab displays small bitmap
images of drawings in the specified directory and sorts images by file type.
The Search tab searches for files by specified type or date of creation.

Locate
Searches for the file name you enter in the File name window.

Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file.

98 | Chapter 1 Commands
AMCOPYOUT
Places a part or subassembly in an external file

Use AMCOPYOUT to create a new drawing file of a selected part or subassembly.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤
Copy Out.
Toolbutton Output Part Definition
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Copy Out
Command AMCOPYOUT

Part/Subassembly Out Dialog Box

Select Part/Subassembly
Select a part or subassembly from the list.

Pick
Select a part or subassembly on screen.
Select Part/Subassembly: Specify a part or subassembly

File
Opens the Output File dialog box and specifies the file name for the new part
or subassembly.

OK
Writes the selected part or subassembly to a new file.

AMCOPYOUT | 99
 Output File Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder for the new file.

File Name
Specifies the file name of the new file.

Save as Type
Specifies the file extension type for the new file.

AMCOPYSCENE
Makes a copy of the active scene

Use AMCOPYSCENE to create a new copy of the active scene. The copy will
include tweaks, trails, and individual explosion factors.
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose Copy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene ➤ Copy
Scene.
Toolbutton Copy Scene
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Copy Scene
Command AMCOPYSCENE

100 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Enter new scene name of the active scene (SCENE1) <SCENE2>:
Specify a name for the new scene, or press ENTER
Enter overall explosion factor <0>:
Specify an explosion factor, or press ENTER to accept the default
Activate new scene? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Choose an option or press ENTER

The name of the new copy is set in Scene Options and can be modified.

AMCOPYSKETCH
Selects single sketch to copy and specifies placement of the sketch center

Use AMCOPYSKETCH to create a copy of an existing sketch. AMCOPYSKETCH

copies all independent constraints, dimensions, sketch geometry, and
construction geometry.
Browser Right-click the profile, path, cut line, break line, or split
line icon, and choose Copy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Copy Sketch.
Toolbutton Copy Sketch
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Sketch
Command AMCOPYSKETCH

Enter an option (source of the sketch) [Sketch/Feature] <Sketch>:

Specify an option

If you select the Browser or Context Menu method, the sketch option is auto-
matically activated.

Sketch
Copies a selected sketch and specifies placement of the sketch center.
Select sketch to copy: Specify a sketch
Sketch center: Specify a point
Sketch center: Specify another point or press ENTER

AMCOPYSKETCH | 101
 Feature
Copies the sketch used to create a feature from any other part in the current
drawing and specifies placement of the sketch center.
Select the feature that the sketch will be copied from: Specify a feature
Select the destination part or <active part>: Select a part
Select the destination face or <active sketch plane>: Select a face or press ENTER
Specify the sketch center for placement: Specify a point
Parameters=Independent
Specify the sketch center for placement or [Parameters/Rotate/Mirror] <accept>:
Specify another point or choose an option

Parameters
Specifies whether the copied sketch is dependent on, or independent from,
the original sketch. If it is dependent on the original sketch, any modifica-
tions to either sketch affects both sketches.
Enter an option [Dependent/Independent] <Dependent>: Choose an option

Rotate
Allows you to rotate the copied sketch, using an existing part edge or a rota-
tion angle.
Select an edge for alignment or Enter the rotation angle <90>:
Select an edge or specify an angle

Mirror
Mirrors the copied sketch in its current position. No prompt is displayed with
this option.

102 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMCORNER
Creates a blended fillet corner surface from three intersecting fillet surfaces

Use AMCORNER to create blended corner fillets from three intersecting fillet
surfaces. Each surface edge of the corner fillet that AMCORNER creates can
have a different radius and can be trimmed or not trimmed. The resulting
fillet surface is independent of the other surfaces.

3 2

fillet surfaces selected corner fillet created

Toolbutton Corner Fillet Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Corner Fillet
Command AMCORNER

Trim=Yes
Select first fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the first surface
Trim=Yes
Select second fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the second surface
Trim=Yes
Select third fillet surface or [Trim]: Enter t or select the third surface

Trim
Trims the edges of the selected surfaces to the edge of the new corner surface.
Trim surfaces? [Yes/No] <No>: Specify whether or not surfaces are trimmed

NOTE If the fillet surfaces do not intersect each other because they are too
short, remake these surfaces using the AMFILLETSF command’s Base option. The
Base option creates surfaces that are long enough to intersect each other.

The following error message is displayed if the selected surfaces don’t intersect:
Error - No intersections found

AMCORNER | 103
AMCUTLINE
Creates a cut line sketch for an offset section view

Use AMCUTLINE in Model mode to create parametric cut lines for an offset
section view. Because the cut line is parametric, it changes when parent
features change. The start and end points of the cut line must be outside the
part. You can create an offset cut line or an aligned cut line.

offset cut line aligned cut line

An offset cut line is constructed with orthogonal segments. Any number of

segments can be used to create an offset cut line, but the first and last
segments must be parallel. Segments can change direction only in 90-degree
increments.
An aligned cut line is constructed of nonorthogonal segments. Only two
segments are allowed, but they can change direction at any angle.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Cut Line.
Toolbutton Cut Line
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Cut Line
Command AMCUTLINE

Select objects to define the section cutting line: Select objects

Select objects to define the section cutting line:
Select more objects or press ENTER

Constrain the cut line to the active part using AMADDCON and AMPARDIM.

104 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMDATUMID
Creates datums represented as frames containing an alphabetic character

Use AMDATUMID to create datum identifiers that conform to ANSI, BSI, DIN,
ISO, JIS, CSN, and GB International Drafting Standards.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤

Datum Identifier.
Toolbutton Datum Identifier
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier
Command AMDATUMID

Select object to attach: Specify a drawing object

Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint or press ENTER

To place a symbol without a leader, press ENTER after you specify a start point.

Datum Identifier Dialog Box

The Datum Identifier dialog box contains a field for entering the value of the
Datum Identifier and a button that controls the type of arrowhead to use. In
the lower-left corner of the dialog box, the button with the symbol accesses
the Symbol Standards dialog box, allowing you to set and modify the symbol
standards you are using in your drawing. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

AMDATUMID | 105
 Attach
Allows you to respecify the object the datum identifier is attached to.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Datum Identifier dialog box
to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the prop-
erties of the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Datum Identifiers

When making changes to datum identifiers, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a datum identifier with the geometry it is

attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a datum identifier to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back
into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a datum identifier into other applications brings it in as a .wmf,
.dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a datum identifier, the symbol and leader become unasso-
ciated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or
AMPOWEREDIT.

AMDATUMTGT
Creates datum target symbols

Use AMDATUMTGT to place datum targets in your drawing. A datum establishes

a theoretically exact plane, line, or profile.
Because all features are subject to deviation, it may be impractical to control
the tolerance of an entire surface via a datum. To specify practical datums,
you select relevant locations called datum targets.
Datum target symbols conform to variations unique to ANSI, BSI, DIN, ISO,
JIS, CSN, and GB International Drafting Standards.
You can place a datum target on a leader or attach one datum target to
another. A datum target can be a point, a line, or an area.

106 | Chapter 1 Commands

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤
Datum Identifier.
Toolbutton Datum Target
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Datum Identifier
Command AMDATUMTGT

Select object to attach: Specify an object

Termination Type Dialog Box

Hold your cursor over each button for a descriptive tooltip.

Attached to Another
Attaches the current datum target to an existing datum target, and opens the
Datum Target dialog box.
Select Datum Target: Select an existing datum target

AMDATUMTGT | 107
 None
Creates a datum target without a special termination symbol, and opens the
Datum Target dialog box.
Select first point: Specify a point
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Point
Creates a datum target symbol, using a point symbol as the termination type,
and opens the Datum Target dialog box.
Select first point: Specify a point
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Line
Attaches a datum target to a line, and opens the Datum Target dialog box.
First line point: Specify the start point
Second line point: Specify the endpoint
Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

108 | Chapter 1 Commands

Circle
Attaches a datum target to a hatched circle, and opens the Datum Target
dialog box.
Center point: Specify a center point
Diameter/<Radius><1.0000> Choose an option or press ENTER
Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Rectangle
Attaches a datum target to a hatched rectangle, and opens the Datum Target
dialog box.
Center point: Specify a center point
Corner: Specify a point for one corner
Next Point: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Datum Target Dialog Box

The Datum Target dialog box contains two tabs, Datum Target and Leader.

Datum Target Tab

AMDATUMTGT | 109
 Dimension
Specifies the dimension for the target area.
Datum
Specifies the datum reference for the target.

Leader Tab

Linetype
Toggles the leader linetype between solid and hidden.
Arrowhead
Changes the leader arrowhead.
Attach
Allows you to respecify the geometry the datum target is attached to.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Datum Target dialog box to
open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the proper-
ties for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Datum Target Symbols

When making changes to datum target symbols, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a datum target symbol with the geometry it

is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a datum target symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it
back into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a datum target symbol into other applications brings it in as a
.wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a datum target symbol, the symbol and leader become
unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using
AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

110 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMDELCON
Removes constraints from the selected sketch

Use AMDELCON to remove constraints from the selected sketch, changing the
geometric relationships between sketched objects. AMDELCON displays the
constraints already applied to the sketch, and provides you with options to
change the constraint display size and select constraints to delete individually
or globally.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D
Constraints ➤ Delete Constraints.
Toolbutton Delete Constraint
Desktop Menu Part ➤ 2D Constraints ➤ Delete Constraints
Command AMDELCON

Select sketch from which to remove the constraint: Select a sketch

NOTE If there is only one sketch in the drawing, this prompt is not displayed.

Select or [Size/All]: Choose an option or specify a constraint

Select or [Size/All]: Choose an option, specify another constraint, or press ENTER

All
Selects all constraints. If you choose this option, all constraints are deleted
and the command exits.

Size
Redisplays all constraints at a specified size.
Enter new value for AMCONDSPSZ (Constraint display size) <current>:
Specify a value

AMDELCON | 111
AMDELETE
Deletes part definitions, part instances, and scenes from the current assembly model

Use AMDELETE to remove a part definition, a part instance, or a scene from

your drawing.
Browser Right-click the part or scene icon and choose Delete.
Command AMDELETE

Delete: [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>:

Choose an option or press ENTER

If you use the Browser method, the prompt is not displayed.

Part Definition
Specifies the part definition to delete.
Select part definition to delete or [?] <PART1>: Select the part or enter ? for a list

Scene
Specifies the scene to delete.
Enter scene name to delete or [?] <SCENE1>: Enter ? for a list or press ENTER

Part Instance
Specifies the part instance to delete.
Select part instance to delete or [?] <PART1_1>: Enter ? for a list or press ENTER

If the part instance you are deleting is the last instance in the drawing for a
specific part definition, an AutoCAD message asks if you also want to remove
the part definition from the drawing.

112 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMDELFEAT
Deletes features from the selected part

Use AMDELFEAT to delete part geometry by selecting an edge or face belonging

to the feature. For a work plane, work point, or work axis, select the displayed
feature. If the selected feature has dependent features, they are also deleted.
Browser In the Part or Assembly tab, right-click the feature icon
and choose Delete.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features
➤ Delete.
Toolbutton Delete Feature
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Delete Feature
Command AMDELFEAT

Select feature to delete: Select feature

Enter an option [Next/Accept] <Accept>: Hole1:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature or press ENTER
Highlighted features will be deleted. Continue? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Yes
Deletes the highlighted feature.

No
Cancels the command.

AMDELFEAT | 113
AMDELTRAIL
Deletes a selected trail

Use AMDELTRAIL in Scene mode to delete assembly trails.

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click the part icon and choose
Delete Trail.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete Trail.
Toolbutton Delete Trail
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Delete Trail
Command AMDELTRAIL

Select trail to delete: Select the trail to delete

AMDELTWEAKS
Deletes all tweaks associated with the selected parts

Use AMDELTWEAKS in Scene mode to remove tweaks. Once the tweaks are
removed, the part moves back to its original position.
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click the part icon and choose
Delete Tweak.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete Tweak.
Toolbutton Delete Tweak
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Delete Tweak
Command AMDELTWEAKS

Select part/subassembly to delete tweaks from: Select a part or subassembly

114 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMDELVIEW
Deletes specified views and all views dependent upon them

Use AMDELVIEW in Drawing mode to delete specified drawing views and all
dependent views.
If the selected drawing view has dependent views, you can delete the view
and its dependent views, or delete only the selected view.
Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose
Delete.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Delete View.
Toolbutton Delete View
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Delete View
Command AMDELVIEW

Select view to delete: Select the view to delete

If the view you are deleting has dependent views, the Delete Dependent Views
dialog box is displayed. Use this dialog box to delete or retain dependent views.

AMDIMALIGN
Aligns linear, rotated, aligned, or angular dimensions with a base dimension of the same
type

Use AMDIMALIGN to align dimensions in Drawing mode to a selected base

dimension.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Align Dimension.
Toolbutton Align Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimension ➤ Align Dimension
Command AMDIMALIGN

AMDELVIEW | 115
 Select base dimension:
Select a linear, rotated, aligned, or angular base dimension
Select linear dimensions to align: Select a dimension that matches the base type
Select linear dimensions to align: Select another dimension or press ENTER

The base dimension determines the type of dimension to align. AMDIMALIGN

ignores dimensions that do not match the base dimension type.

If you select a set of dimensions that have dimension lines inside and outside
the extension lines, and the dimension lines and arrowheads overlap, use
UNDO, or adjust the dimensions individually instead of using AMDIMALIGN.
AMDIMALIGN does not recognize extension line suppression.

AMDIMARRANGE
Arranges dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode

Use AMDIMARRANGE to arrange dimensions in Model mode and Drawing

mode.

before AMDIMARRANGE after AMDIMARRANGE

Command AMDIMARRANGE

Select dimensions and contour entities: Specify a dimension or an edge

Select dimensions and contour entities:
Specify another dimension or edge, or press ENTER
Select point on contour (RETURN for automatic):
Specify a point on an edge, or press ENTER

116 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMDIMBREAK
Creates breaks in an existing dimension or extension line of a single associative
dimension, while maintaining associativity

Use AMDIMBREAK in Drawing mode to break the dimension or extension

lines of a linear, aligned, rotated, ordinate, radial, diameter, or angular,
associative dimension without losing associativity.

With AMDIMBREAK, you can increase the readability of drawings without

having to explode dimensions. If the dimension is updated, modified, or
restored, the break will revert to a solid line.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Break Dimension.
Toolbutton Break Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Break Dimension
Command AMDIMBREAK

Select dimension or extension line to break: Select a dimension

Second point [First point/Restore]: Choose an option, or specify a second point

First Point
Specifies the first break point.
First point: Specify the first break point
Second point: Specify the second break point

Restore
Removes the break from a selected dimension.

Second Point
Specifies the second point for the break.
Second point: Specify the second break point

AMDIMBREAK | 117
AMDIMDSP
Changes the display mode for dimensions

Use AMDIMDSP to change the display mode for the dimensions of all parts
and sketches, without affecting the drawing. You can display the dimensions
as parameters, equations, or numbers.

Dimensions as Parameters
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Parameters.
Toolbutton Display as Variables
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Parameters
Command AMDIMDSP

Dimensions as Equations
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Equations.
Toolbutton Display as Equations
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Equations
Command AMDIMDSP

Dimensions as Numbers
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Numbers.
Toolbutton Display as Numbers
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Dimensions as Numbers
Command AMDIMDSP

Enter an option [Parameters/Equations/Numeric] <Numeric>: Enter an option

118 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Numeric
Shows dimensions as numbers.

Parameters
Shows dimensions as variables.

Equations
Shows dimensions as equations.

AMDIMFORMAT
Edits individual linear, radial, diameter, or angular dimensions, using a graphical
interface, and reflects changes in your drawing while you use the Dimension Formatter
dialog box

Use AMDIMFORMAT to modify dimensions in Drawing mode. Changes made

in the Dimension Formatter dialog box change on screen, so you can see the
results before accepting them.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Edit Format.
Toolbutton Edit Format
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Edit Format
Command AMDIMFORMAT

Select a dimension entity: Select a dimension

AMDIMFORMAT recognizes the selected dimension type and opens the

Dimension Formatter dialog box with options that apply to the selected
dimension type.

Dimension Formatter Dialog Box

The Dimension Formatter dialog box contains five tabs whose options
change, depending on the type of dimension selected.

AMDIMFORMAT | 119
 Geometry Tab
The Geometry tab controls arrowheads, extension lines, and dimension line
properties.

Format Tab
The Format tab controls orientation, placement, and fit of text.

Units Tab
The Units tab controls text style and primary unit information. Alternate
unit precision can also be controlled.

120 | Chapter 1 Commands

Tolerance Tab
The Tolerance tab controls types of tolerances and tolerance values.

Text Edit Tab

The Text Edit tab allows quick editing of text values, including the addition
of special symbols.

NOTE AMDIMFORMAT does not format ordinate dimensions.

AMDIMFORMAT | 121
AMDIMINSERT
Edits linear, aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions by inserting a new dimension
between existing dimensions of the same type simultaneously, as opposed to inserting
dimensions individually

Use AMDIMINSERT to divide an existing dimension into two individual

dimensions. AMDIMINSERT breaks the base dimension at a selected point and
inserts a new dimension at the break.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Insert Dimension.
Toolbutton Insert Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Insert Dimension
Command AMDIMINSERT

Select base dimension: Select a linear, aligned, rotated, or angular dimension (1)
Select point on object for extension line origin:
Select a start point for the new dimension (2)

AMDIMJOIN
Edits linear, aligned, and angular (3-point or 2-line) dimensions by joining similar
dimensions into a single dimension

Use AMDIMJOIN to join two dimensions. The base dimension determines the
type of dimension that can be joined. AMDIMJOIN ignores dimensions that do
not match the base dimension type. In an angular dimension, the direction
of the join is determined by bisecting the dimension and using the half where
the extension line was initially selected.

122 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Join Dimension.
Toolbutton Join Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Join Dimension
Command AMDIMJOIN

Select base dimension:

Select a linear, rotated, aligned, or angular base dimension
Select linear dimensions to join: Select a dimension that matches the base type
Select linear dimensions to join: Select another dimension or press ENTER

AMDIRECTION
Displays the direction of objects and reverses their direction

In NC (Numeric Control) machining, and in design operations like CMM

(Coordinate Measuring Machine) certification, you often need to know the
direction of objects to control the approach angle of a machine.
Use AMDIRECTION to check and change the direction of wires to get better
results when creating certain kinds of surfaces. AMDIRECTION displays an
indicator to show the direction of the selected objects and allows you to
reverse direction.
Toolbutton Wire Direction
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wire ➤ Direction
Command AMDIRECTION

Select wires: Select a wire

Select wires: Select another wire or press ENTER
Reverse wire direction? [Yes/No] <No>: Choose an option

AMDIRECTION | 123
AMDISPSF
Controls how surfaces are displayed

Use AMDISPSF to change the size of a surface normal, the number of U and V
polylines displayed on a surface, and the number of surface patches displayed.
Also use AMDISPSF to control how the base surface and the control points are
displayed.
Knowing the approximate number of internal patches helps you judge the
complexity of a surface. Displaying the base surface can be useful when it is
not the same as the current displayed surface.
Toolbutton Surface Display
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Surface Display
Command AMDISPSF

Select surfaces: Select a surface

Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER

Individual Surface Display Dialog Box

Persistent Display
Shows and changes the attributes of a single or multiple surfaces. If the
attributes of multiple surfaces differ, Varies is displayed. Enter a new value for
the surface(s).
Normal Length
Changes the current length of the surface normals of the selected surfaces.
Number of U Lines
Changes the number of U lines in the selected surfaces.

124 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Number of V Lines
Changes the number of V lines in the selected surfaces.

Temporary Display
Displays surface patch normals and the base surface.
Show Patch Normals
Displays the surface normal at the beginning of each internal base surface
patch until the viewport is redrawn.
Show Base Surface
Displays the boundaries of the base surface for the selected surface(s) until
the viewport is redrawn.
Show Control Points
Displays the control points on the base surface until the viewport is redrawn.
The points are connected to each other by temporary lines that represent the
control net.

AMDIST
Measures the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or parametric parts

Use AMDIST to measure the minimum 3D distance between selected objects or

parametric parts. You can define any number of objects or parts as the first and
second sets. AMDIST finds the minimum 3D distance between the two sets.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤
Minimum 3D Distance.
Toolbutton Minimum 3D Distance
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Minimum 3D Distance
Command AMDIST

Next instance [Objects]: Choose an option, or select the first part

Next instance: Select another part for the first set, or press ENTER
Next instance [Objects]: Choose an option, select the second part, or press ENTER
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next part or press ENTER
Next instance: Select another part for the second set, or press ENTER
Output: [Display/Line] <Display>: Choose an option, or press ENTER
Minimum distance: <2.880839>

Objects
Specifies 2D and 3D AutoCAD objects.

AMDIST | 125
 Instance
Specifies Mechanical Desktop part instances.

Line
Draws a line representing the minimum 3D distance.

Display
Displays a temporary line representing the minimum 3D distance.

AMDWGDIMDSP
Changes the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode

Use AMDWGDIMDSP in Drawing mode to change the display mode for para-
metric dimensions to parameters, equations, or numbers.

Dimensions as Parameters
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as
Parameters
Command AMDWGDIMDSP

Dimensions as Equations
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as
Equations
Command AMDWGDIMDSP

Dimensions as Numbers
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Parametric Dim Display ➤ Dimensions as
Numbers
Command AMDWGDIMDSP

Enter option [Numeric/Equation/Parameter] <Parameter>: Enter an option

Select dimension or [All/View/Select dimensions] <Select dimensions>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Select objects: Select a dimension
Select objects: Select another dimension or press ENTER

126 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Parameters
Displays dimensions as variables.

Equations
Displays dimensions as equations.

Numeric
Displays dimensions as numbers.

All
Selects all dimensions on the current layout.

View
Selects all dimensions in the current view.

Select Dimensions
Selects individual dimensions.

AMDWGVIEW
Creates base, orthographic, auxiliary, isometric, detail, section, and broken drawing views

Use AMDWGVIEW to create views in Drawing mode of your parts and assem-
blies. Any changes to your design are automatically updated in the drawing
views.
Browser Right-click a Layout icon in the Drawing tab, and choose
New View.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose New View.
Toolbutton New View
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ New View
Command AMDWGVIEW

AMDWGVIEW | 127
 Create Drawing View Dialog Box

View Type
Specifies the type of view to create.
Base
Creates a base view of a drawing according to the orientation you select.
Multiple
Creates multiple projected views of a parent view. If no view exists, creates a
base view first which becomes the parent view.
Ortho
Creates an orthographic view of the parent view.
Auxiliary
Creates an auxiliary view of the part face you select.
Iso
Creates an isometric view of the parent view.
Detail
Creates an enlarged view of a portion of the parent view.
Broken
Creates a broken view.

Data Set
Specifies the data set to use for the new view.
Active Part
Uses the active part for the view.

128 | Chapter 1 Commands

Scene
Uses a selected scene for the view.
Select
Uses selected objects for the view.
Group
Uses a specified group of objects. This option is only available if you have
defined a group of objects in the drawing.

Layout
Places the view on the selected layout.

Properties
Controls view properties.
Scale
Sets the scale for the view.
Relative to Parent
Specifies whether the view is scaled relative to its parent view.

Options
Opens the Desktop Options dialog box where you can set options for your
drawing views. See “AMOPTIONS” on page 232.

Hidden Lines Tab

Controls the settings for hidden lines in drawing views.
Calculate Hidden Lines
Turns on the Calculate Hidden Line option. If off, hidden lines are not calcu-
lated or displayed in the view.
Display Hidden Lines
Displays hidden lines in the view.
Display Tangencies
Displays tangent silhouettes in the view.
Remove Coincident Edges
Removes duplicate edges in the view.
Display as
Controls the display of hidden edges when the Calculate Hidden Lines
option is disabled.
Wireframe Displays the view as a wireframe model.
Wireframe Displays the view as a wireframe model with silhouette
with Silh edges.

AMDWGVIEW | 129
 Section Tab
Controls the settings for section views.
Type
Controls the type of section view.
None Does not create a section view.
Full Creates a full section view for base, auxiliary, broken, and
orthographic views.
Half Creates a half section view through a work plane or work
point.
Offset Creates an offset section view from base, orthographic,
broken, or auxiliary views.
Aligned Creates an aligned section view from base, orthographic,
or auxiliary views.
Breakout Creates a breakout section view from base, orthographic,
or auxiliary views.
Radial Creates a radial section view from base, orthographic, or
auxiliary views.
Symbol
Specifies the symbol to use for section views.
View Label
Specifies the label for the section view.
Hatch
Specifies whether a section view is hatched.
Pattern
Sets the hatch pattern and parameters for a section view. Opens the AutoCAD
Hatch Patterns dialog box.
Hide Obscured Hatch
Hides hatch patterns normally out of view or obscured.

130 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMEDGE
Untrims, copies, and extracts edges of surfaces, and shows edge nodes of surfaces and
faces

Automatic trimming meets most design requirements for trimming simple

surfaces. To solve more complex situations, use AMEDGE.
AMEDGE removes trim edges from a surface and converts the surface either to
ordinary 3D polylines or to splines. You edit the edges as 3D polylines or
splines using standard AutoCAD editing commands and project them back
onto the surface.
AMEDGE can permanently remove trim edges from a surface (untrim it) to
make it a base surface, and make copies of edges or surface trims (in the form
of 3D polylines or splines). You can also use AMEDGE to display the nodes of
both base surface edges (untrimmed surfaces) and faces (trimmed surfaces).
Toolbutton Copy Surface Edge
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Copy Edge
Command AMEDGE

Output=Polyline
Select surface loop to copy or [Copy edge/Output/Show nodes/Untrim]:
Select a surface or choose an option
Select surface loop to copy: Choose another surface or press ENTER

Extract Loop
Removes a complete loop from a selected surface, so that you can edit its
edges. The loop may consist of one or more lines, but this option converts
them to a spline or a 3D polyline for editing.
If there are trim edges remaining after the selected edge or loop is removed
from the base surface or face, the remaining trim edges are left on the surface.
If there are no remaining trim edges, the surface is converted to a base sur-
face. If you select a base surface with no interior trim edges, the software
extracts a copy of the base edges of the base surface and converts them into
four polylines. Each extracted loop is put into an AutoCAD group.

original surface loop extracted and moved for editing

AMEDGE | 131
 The 3D polyline or spline output created by this option overlays the surface
but is independent of it. The polylines exist on the current layer in the current
color. AMEDGE keeps track of the relationship between the removed polylines
(or splines) and the surface, so they can be projected back onto the surface
precisely if not edited.
To delete a single loop from a face with multiple edge loops, remove the loop
with the Extract Loop option and delete the resulting 3D polylines. After
using the Extract Loop option, edit surface edges using any editing command
to create the surface trim shape. Retrim the base surface or face to the
corrected edges using AMPROJECT with the Trim option.

Copy Edge
Copies individual base surface edges.
Select surface edge to copy: Specify a surface edge

An individual base surface edge is that portion of the surface’s edge that lies
between two nodes. Each selected surface edge is copied, and the edge is dis-
played as either a 3D polyline or a spline, depending on the setting of the
Output option. The output is displayed in the current layer and color.

original surface edges copied and moved for clarity

The surface itself is not changed, nor does the surface have any relationship
with the output polylines.

Output
Determines whether the output of the Extract Loop and Copy Edge options
is a spline or a polyline.
Enter an option [Polyline/Spline] <Spline>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Show Nodes
Temporarily displays indicators at the nodes of the selected surface. The
nodes mark the beginning and end of each of the individual edge lines that
make up one or more closed loops. The nodes and lines are displayed in the
GRIPCOLOR.

132 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Select surfaces to show nodes: Specify a surface
Select surfaces to show nodes: Specify another surface or press ENTER

Indicators are displayed on both the base and the face edges. The indicators
disappear when the display is redrawn.

Untrim
Converts a trimmed surface to a base (untrimmed) surface by deleting its
edges, and sets the surface visibility to Unhide.
Select surfaces to untrim: Specify a surface
Select surfaces to untrim: Specify a surface or press ENTER

AMEDGESYM
Creates a symbol that defines the condition of a selected edge

Use AMEDGESYM to define the condition of a selected edge. Information can

include broken, deburred, without burr, sharp-edged, undercut, and recessed.
This command is available only when you are annotating a drawing, using
the DIN international drafting standard.
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Edge Symbol
Command AMEDGESYM

Select object to attach: Specify an edge

Start point: Specify a start point for the leader
Next point <Symbol>: Specify another point or press ENTER

Edge Symbol Dialog Box

AMEDGESYM | 133
 Miscellaneous
Places the edge symbol values in brackets.

Burr
Controls whether the edge has burr information.

Attach/Detach
Detaches a symbol from its associated geometry, or reattaches a detached
symbol.

AMEDIT
Edits welding, surface texture, datum and feature identifier symbols, feature control
frames, and datum targets

Use AMEDIT to modify drawing annotations. Valid annotations include weld-

ing, surface texture, datum, and feature control symbols.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Symbols.
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Symbols
Command AMEDIT

Select object: Select an annotation object

Mechanical Desktop examines the selected annotation and opens the appro-
priate dialog box.

AMEDITAUG
Resizes, rotates, copies, and corrects vectors on augmented lines and creates augmented
lines from lines and polylines

Use AMEDITAUG to make the following modifications to the vectors on an

augmented line without changing the character of the line itself:

■ To change the length of the vectors

■ To rotate the vectors to a specific angle or plane
■ To copy the vectors to a defined vector
■ To correct the augmented line by blending or replacing individual vectors
with copies

134 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMEDITAUG also adds vectors to a polyline to create an augmented line.
The vectors of augmented lines describe a direction at each vertex of the
augmented lines.
The capability of AMEDITAUG to modify the vectors of augmented lines may
be useful for controlling 5-axis NC (Numeric Control) milling machines, CMM
(Coordinate Measuring Machines) checking machines, and 5-axis laser cutting
devices. Rotating the vectors controls the approach angle of the cutting device.
With AMEDITAUG you can also control an augmented line to be used as a rail
for sweeping surfaces and the tangency of one surface to another for blending
surfaces.
You create augmented lines from 3D polylines, lines, and polylines with the
Add Vectors option of AMEDITAUG.
Toolbutton Edit Augmented Line
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Augment Polyline
Command AMEDITAUG

Enter an option [Add vectors/Blend/Copy/Normal length/Rotate/Twist] <exit>:

Choose an option or press ENTER

Add Vectors
Creates an augmented line, which you can edit, by adding vectors to a
polyline.
Select lines or polylines: Select a line or polyline
Select lines or polylines: Select another line or polyline, or press ENTER

polylines selected augmented lines created

Blend
Aligns the vectors of an augmented line without changing the character of
the line or the position of the vectors on the line. The Blend option creates a
gradual transition in alignment between vectors that are significantly
misaligned with adjacent vectors.
Select vector to blend or [All/Range]: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMEDITAUG | 135
 Select Vector
Blends the selected vector between the two adjacent vectors.
If the selected vector is at the beginning or end of the augmented line, the
software creates a smooth transition between it and the next two vectors.
All
Blends all vectors between the first and last vector.
Select augmented line: Specify the first augmented line
Select augmented line: Specify the last augmented line

Range
Blends all the vectors between two selected vectors, including the selected
vectors.
Select first vector: Specify the first vector
Select last vector: Specify the last vector

Copy
Replaces a vector on an augmented line with a copy of another vector. The
Copy option copies a master vector from one augmented line and pastes it to
the same, or a different, augmented line.
Choose this option to correct a few vectors that are misaligned so you can
blend an adjacent vector. Replace the misaligned vectors with a copy of one
that blends better with adjacent vectors.
Select vector to be copied: Select a vector to copy
Select vector or [All/Range]: Choose an option or press ENTER

Select Vector
Replaces the vector or vectors you select with a copy of the master vector.
All
Replaces all vectors in an augmented line with copies of a master vector.
Range
Replaces all the vectors between and including the two selected vectors with
a copy of the master vector.

136 | Chapter 1 Commands

Normal Length
Increases or decreases the displayed length of all vectors in an augmented
line. The default length doesn’t change.
Select augmented lines: Select an augmented line
Select augmented lines: Select another augmented line or press ENTER
Normal length <0.5000>: Specify a length

Rotate
Rotates selected vectors to a plane or a specified number of degrees.
Enter an option [Angle/Plane] <Angle>: Choose an option

Plane
Rotates a vector parallel to the imaginary plane you specify. The vectors
retain their individual orientation when viewed normal to the plane.
Specify first plane location or [Last/View/Wire/Xy/Yz/zAxis/Zx]:
Specify 3 points, choose an option, or press ENTER
Angle
Rotates selected vectors a number of degrees.
Angle <90>: Specify an angle
Select vector to rotate or [All/Range]: Choose an option

Twist
Edits vectors of an augmented line into a spiral about the line. The vectors
serve as a basis for helical surfaces, spring coils, and other useful surfaces.
Enter total angle <360>: Specify an angle
Enter an option [All/Range] <All>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select augmented line: Specify an augmented line
Select augmented line: Specify another augmented line or press ENTER

All
Twists all vectors on the selected line.
Range
Twists all vectors between two vectors.

AMEDITAUG | 137
AMEDITCONST
Changes distance and angle offsets in constraints and deletes individual or all assembly
constraints

Use AMEDITCONST to make changes to assembly constraints.

Browser Right-click the constraint icon and choose Edit.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D
Constraints ➤ Edit.
Toolbutton Edit Constraints
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Edit
Command AMEDITCONST

NOTE In the Browser method, the dialog box allows editing of only the
selected constraint. You cannot delete it. In the other command methods, the
dialog box allows editing and deleting of all constraints.

Edit 3D Constraint Dialog Box (Browser)

Type
Lists the type of constraint being edited.

Offset
Lists the current offset value.

Expression
Specifies the new value for the constraint.

Update Icon
Updates the assembly to show the current settings.

138 | Chapter 1 Commands

Edit 3D Constraints Dialog Box

Constrained Parts
Lists the parts that have 3D constraints applied to them. Select a part from
the list to view constraints.

Select
Selects the part to edit.

Constraints
Displays information about the highlighted constraint.
Count
Displays the number of constraints applied to the selected part.
Show
Displays the constraints on a selected part.
Type
Displays the type of constraint.
Offset
Displays the offset value of the current constraint.

Edit Constraint
Specifies the new value.

Update Icon
Updates the assembly to show the current settings.

AMEDITCONST | 139
 Delete Constraints
Deletes constraints for the selected part.
All
Deletes all the constraints applied to the selected part.
Current
Deletes the current constraint.

AMEDITFEAT
Edits existing features by displaying and modifying dimension values

Use AMEDITFEAT to make modifications to features that make up a part. Any

feature that defines the part can be modified using this command.
Browser In the Part or Assembly tab, right-click the feature icon
and choose Edit.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features
➤ Edit.
Toolbutton Edit Feature
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Edit Feature
Command AMEDITFEAT

Enter an option [Independent array instance/Sketch/surfCut/Toolbody/select

Feature] <select Feature>: Choose an option or select a feature to edit

Sketch
Rolls back to the original sketch so you can change its geometry.
Select sketched feature: Select a feature

Independent Array Instance

Allows you to edit a single instance of an array feature.
Select feature array instance: Select an array instance

140 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Surfcut
Allows you to edit a feature created by a surface cut.
Select surfcut feature: Select a feature

Toolbody
Rolls back to a toolbody used to create a combined feature.
Select parametric boolean to edit: Select a combined feature

Select Feature
Selects a feature to edit. Mechanical Desktop examines the selected feature
and opens the appropriate dialog box if, available.
Enter an option [Next/Accept] <Accept>: Combine1:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature or press ENTER

If there are parametric dimensions controlling the feature you have selected,
the following prompts are also displayed:
Select the object to edit: Specify a dimension
Enter the new value for dimension <current>: Specify a value or press ENTER

AMEDITSF
Changes the density of surface grip points, changes the grip span and the direction of
surface normals, and truncates surfaces

Use AMEDITSF to edit surfaces by

■ Changing the density of surface grips in both the U and V directions

■ Changing the span or distance between grips
■ Flipping the surface normal
■ Truncating the surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Overall Edit

Command AMEDITSF

Select surfaces to edit: Select a surface

Select surfaces to edit: Select another surface or press ENTER

AMEDITSF | 141
 Surface Edit Dialog Box

Grips
The ability to modify the grips on a surface provides you with a free-form way
to design complex surface models.
Grips editing can be used in sheet metal panel manufacturing to supply over-
bend to the tools, which compensates for the springback that occurs in the
stamping process. Grips editing varies the amount of springback across a
surface.
U
Specifies the number of U-direction grip points on the surface.
V
Specifies the number of V-direction grip points on the surface.
Span
Specifies the radius of a circle of influence that a grip has across a surface
when used in a stretch mode.
After specifying the number of grip points, previewing your choices, and
exiting AMEDITSF, use the grips to stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror the
surface.
Primitive surfaces have a different definition of U and V grips. They actually
have no grips in the U and V directions and a span of 0.0.
When you change the number of U grips, V grips, or the span of a primitive-
cone, sphere, cylinder, torus, or revolved surface the following message is
displayed:
Primitive surface definition has been removed.

Normal Direction
Flips the normal from one side of the surface to the other. The direction of the
surface normal indicates the positive side of the surface. Surfaces are offset
according to the direction of their surface normals.

142 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Some applications require the normal to be on the opposite side of the sur-
face. For example, to run a cutter path, the direction of the surface normal
might need to be changed.

Preview
Displays a preview of the surface grip points and span. The grips are the
GRIPCOLOR and the span is the GRIPHOTCOL. The span circle is displayed
perpendicular to the normal on the outer loop of the surface with the center
of the circle at the normal location.

Span
Controls the radius of the circle of influence that a grip has across a surface
when used to stretch the surface.

Truncate
Cuts the selected base surface to its minimum size, which is only large
enough to support the current surface trim without changing the shape of
the trimmed surface.
Often, a trimmed surface is based on a base surface that is much larger than
the outermost trim boundary. Selecting Truncate reduces the size of your
drawing database and improves performance.

AMEDITTRAIL
Modifies the explosion path start and end offsets in an assembly scene

Use AMEDITTRAIL to modify where an explosion path begins and ends in an

assembly scene relative to current part positions.
The options under Offset at Current Position specify the end of the trail
relative to the current position of the part after it has been exploded and
tweaked. The options under Offset at Assembled Position specify the end
of the trail relative to the assembled position of the part before it has been
exploded and tweaked.
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a part icon and choose Edit
Trail.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Trail.
Toolbutton Edit Trail
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Edit Trail
Command AMEDITTRAIL

Select trail to edit: Select a trail

AMEDITTRAIL | 143
 Trail Offsets Dialog Box

Offset at Current Position

Controls the trail offset values for the current position of the part.
Distance
Specifies the offset between a reference point on the part and the end of the
trail.
Pick
Closes the dialog box temporarily and allows you to use the cursor to pick
points to determine the distance.
Over Shoot
Specifies that the trail goes beyond or outside the reference point on the part.
Under Shoot
Specifies that the trail stops short or inside of the reference point on the part.

Offset at Assembled Position

Controls the trail offsets at the assembled position of the part.
Distance
Specifies the offset between a reference point on the part and the end of the
trail.
Pick
Closes the dialog box temporarily and allows you to use the cursor to pick
points to determine the distance.
Over Shoot
Specifies that the trail goes beyond or outside the reference point on the part.
Under Shoot
Specifies that the trail stops short or inside of the reference point on the part.

144 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMEDITVIEW
Modifies the scale, associativity, and hidden line display of a drawing view

Use AMEDITVIEW to edit views created in Drawing mode.

Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click the view icon and choose
Edit.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit View.
Toolbutton Edit View
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Edit View
Command AMEDITVIEW

Select view to edit: Select a drawing view

In the Browser method you will not be prompted to select a view.

View Type Dialog Box

Properties
Controls the properties of the selected view.
Scale
Specifies a scale factor for the view.

AMEDITVIEW | 145
 Placement
Controls the placement of the selected view.
Move with Parent
If the view has an associated parent view, specifies whether the view moves
when the parent view is moved.
No Alignment
Specifies no alignment with its parent view.
Horizontal
Aligns the view horizontally with its parent view.
Vertical
Aligns the view vertically with its parent view.

Hidden Lines Tab

Controls the settings for hidden lines in drawing views.
Calculate Hidden Lines
Turns on the Calculate Hidden Line option. If off, hidden lines are not calcu-
lated or displayed in the view.
Display Hidden Lines
Displays hidden lines in the view.
Display Tangencies
Displays tangent silhouettes in the view.
Remove Coincident Edges
Removes duplicate edges in the view.
Display as
Controls the display of hidden edges when the Calculate Hidden Lines
option is disabled.
Wireframe Displays the view as a wireframe model.
Wireframe with Displays the view as a wireframe model with silhouette
Silh edges.

Display Tab
Controls the display of annotations and edge properties for the selected view.
Annotation Creation
Controls the display of tapped holes and parametric dimensions.
Centerline Settings
Opens the Centerline Settings By View dialog box.

146 | Chapter 1 Commands

Edge Properties
Controls the properties of selected edges.
Enter an option (edge properties) [Remove all/Select/Unhide all] <Select>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Select Selects edges to modify and then opens the Edge

Properties dialog box.
Select Edges: Select an edge
Select Edges: Select another edge or press ENTER
Remove Removes all edge property modifications made to the
view.
Unhide All Unhides all hidden edges in the view.

Edge Properties Dialog Box

Hide Edges
Specifies that selected edges are hidden.

Color
Specifies the color for the selected edges.

Layer
Specifies the layer for the selected edges.

Linetype
Specifies the linetype for the selected edges.

Linetype Scale
Specifies the linetype scale for the selected edges.

AMEDITVIEW | 147
AMEXTRUDE
Creates an extruded solid feature

Use AMEXTRUDE to create an extruded solid feature from the selected profile.

profile extruded feature

Before you create an extruded feature, you must create a sketch profile. See
“AMPROFILE” on page 281. Sketches must have closed boundaries, using any
combination of new sketch geometry, existing model edges, work planes, or
work axes. Your profile can contain internal islands provided they do not
intersect or overlap.
Browser Right-click an unconsumed profile icon and choose
Extrude.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Extrude.
Toolbutton Extrude
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Extrude
Command AMEXTRUDE

NOTE If more than one unconsumed profile exists, select the profile to extrude.

Extrusion Dialog Box

148 | Chapter 1 Commands

Operation
Specifies the Boolean method for creating the extrusion.
Base
Adds material, creating the first feature of a part. Blind, Mid Plane Blind, and
To Plane are the only termination options for a Base operation.
Cut
Removes material from the selected part.
Join
Adds material to the selected part.
Intersect
Creates a new feature from the shared volume of the existing part and the
extruded feature.
Split
Creates a new part by splitting the extrusion from the existing part.

Termination
Determines the method for ending the extrusion. For new parts, the default
termination option is Blind. For existing parts, the default is the last termi-
nation option used.
Blind
Extrudes the feature to a specified depth and displays direction arrows.
Through
Cuts all the way through the solid part. Not available when joining geometry.
Mid Plane
Extrudes the profile equally in both directions, terminating at the specified
overall depth. Not available when joining geometry.
Mid-Through
Extrudes the profile through the part, using the current sketch plane as the
midplane for the extrusion.
To Face/Plane
Defines the extrusion to a specified planar face or work plane.
Select face or work plane: Specify a plane or face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Confirm highlighted plane or face
Enter termination type [Face/Plane] <Face>: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMEXTRUDE | 149
 From to
Defines the start plane or face, and the end plane or face for the extrusion.
Select face or work plane (first termination): Specify the first plane or face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Confirm the highlighted plane or face
Enter termination type [Face/Plane] <Face>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select face or work plane (second termination): Specify the second plane or face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Confirm the highlighted plane or face
Enter termination type [Face/Plane] <Face>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Flip
Flips the direction of the extrusion.

Distance
Specifies the distance for the extrusion. You may enter expressions, equations,
or design variables as values. Right-click in this field for additional options,
including using the Equation Assistant to define values.

Draft Angle
Specifies a draft angle for the extrusion. A negative number creates a negative
draft. The range is +90 to -90 degrees. Right-click in this field for additional
options, including using the Equation Assistant to define values.

AMEXTRUDESF
Creates a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse, spline, or polyline

Use AMEXTRUDESF to create a surface by extruding a line, arc, circle, ellipse,

spline, or polyline in a specified direction. The start point establishes the
extrusion direction.

2D polyline surface extruded

To preserve sharp corners or abrupt changes in curvature, adjust the

AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG settings prior to using AMEXTRUDESF. Multiple
surfaces rather than C0 (abrupt) surfaces are created when you preserve sharp
corners or abrupt changes in curvature in the surface.

150 | Chapter 1 Commands

Toolbutton Extruded Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Extrude
Command AMEXTRUDESF

Select wires to extrude: Select a wire

Select wires to extrude: Select another wire or press ENTER to continue
Define direction and length.
Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]:
Choose an option or specify a start point

Start Point
Specifies the direction for the extrusion by selecting or entering two points
in 3D space.
Specify end point: Specify an end point
Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

ViewDir
Specifies the extrusion in the direction of the current view.
Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a length
Enter an option [Accept/Flip] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

Wire
Specifies an existing wire to define the direction of the extrusion.
Select wire to define direction: Specify a wire
Enter an option [Accept/Flip] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

X/Y/Z
Specifies the X, Y, or Z direction of the current UCS as the extrusion direction.
Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a length
Enter an option [Accept/Flip] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter taper angle <0>: Specify a taper angle

Flip
Flips the direction arrow that specifies the direction of the extrusion.

AMEXTRUDESF | 151
 Taper Angle
Specifies the angle to apply to taper the extrusion.
For closed curves, entering a positive angle tapers out from the base and
entering a negative number tapers in. For other curves, the taper direction is
relative to the direction of the curve being extruded. Specifying a taper angle
for an object with sharp corners or abrupt changes in curvature might cause
the surface to intersect itself.

AMFACEDRAFT
Creates a face draft or slight angle on the faces of a part

Use AMFACEDRAFT to apply draft angles to part faces. Draft angles are used in
manufacturing molds and cast parts.
Face drafts can be created from a work plane or planar face, a part edge, or a
tangent to a cylindrical face.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Face Draft.
Toolbutton Face Draft
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Face Draft
Command AMFACEDRAFT

Face Draft Dialog Box

Type
Controls the type of face draft to apply.

152 | Chapter 1 Commands

From Plane
Creates a face draft from a selected work plane or planar face.

plane selected draft applied

From Edge
Creates a face draft from a selected edge.

edge selected draft applied

Shadow
Creates a face draft from a selected plane to a point tangent to a selected
cylindrical face.

plane selected draft applied

Angle
Controls the angle of the face draft.

Draft Plane
Specifies a plane to use to apply a face draft.
Select draft plane (planar face or work plane): Select a planar face or work plane
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER
Draft direction [Accept/Flip] <Accept>:
Enter f to flip the direction, or press ENTER

AMFACEDRAFT | 153
 Faces to Draft
Controls which faces to apply a face draft to.
Add
Selects faces to add a face draft to.
Select faces to draft (ruled faces only): Select a face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER
Select faces to draft (ruled faces only): Select another face or press ENTER

Reclaim
Selects faces to remove a face draft from.
Select faces to reclaim: Select a face
Select faces to reclaim: Select another face or press ENTER

Include Tangencies
Specifies whether to include tangent faces when applying a face draft. If
checked, tangent faces are automatically selected and draft is applied.

Return to Dialog
Specifies whether to return to the dialog box after creating a face draft.

AMFACESPLIT
Creates two faces from one face

Use AMFACESPLIT to split a face using either a planar or projected method. If

you plan to apply draft to the faces after a split operation, all adjacent faces
must have the coincident edge split at the same location.
Browser Right-click an unconsumed profile and choose Face Split.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Face Split.
Toolbutton Face Split
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Face Split
Command AMFACESPLIT

Enter facesplit type [Planar/pRoject] <pRoject>: Choose an option

154 | Chapter 1 Commands

Creating a Planar Face Split
A planar split intersects the part with a plane, defining a planar split line.

Select faces to split [All]: Enter a to select all, or select a face to split

Select Faces
Select the faces to split.
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER
Select faces to split or [All/Remove]:
Select another face, choose an option, or press ENTER
Select planar face or work plane for split: Specify a face or work plane

All
Selects all part faces to split.
Select faces to remove or [All/aDd]: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select planar face or work plane for split: Specify a face or work plane

Creating a Projected Face Split

A projected split is used to split a face with a split line sketch.

Select faces to split [All]: Enter a to select all, or select a face to split

Select Faces
Select the faces to split.
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER
Select faces to split or [All/Remove]:
Specify another face, choose an option, or press ENTER

AMFACESPLIT | 155
 All
Selects all part faces to split.
Select faces to remove or [All/aDd]: Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE If you are creating a projected face split, and more than one unconsumed
split line exists, select the line to project.

AMFCFRAME
Creates a feature control frame

Use AMFCFRAME to create feature control frames in Drawing mode.

Feature control frames display geometric tolerances that show deviations of
form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. All tolerance
information for a single dimension is contained in the feature control frame.

Feature control frames conform with variations unique to ANSI, BSI, CSN,
DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS International Drafting Standards. DXF group codes are
assigned to feature control frames and allow complete data exchange.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤
Feature Control Frame.
Toolbutton Feature Control Frame
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Feature Control Frame
Command AMFCFRAME

Select object to attach: Specify the object

Start Point: Specify a start point
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify another point or press ENTER

Feature Control Frame Dialog Box

The dialog box contains two tabs, Frame and Leader.

156 | Chapter 1 Commands

Frame Tab
The Frame tab contains settings and symbols for the feature control frame.
You can attach two rows of modifiers to one feature control frame. By default,
only one row is used.
At the bottom of the tab are buttons to facilitate numeric entry and to apply
modifiers and datum names.

Sym
Displays a palette of geometric symbols for straightness, cylindricity, angularity,
position, symmetry, flatness, profile of a line, perpendicularity, concentricity,
total runout, circularity, profile of a surface, parallelism, and circular runout.

Tolerance 1
Specifies the first tolerance.
Tolerance 2
Specifies the second tolerance.
Datum 1
Specifies the value for the first datum line.
Datum 2
Specifies the value for the second datum line.
Datum 3
Specifies the value for the third datum line.

AMFCFRAME | 157
 Leader Tab
Controls leader segments, arrowhead styles, and all round symbols.

Segment / Leader
Adds or removes leader segments from the current feature control frame.
Attach
Specifies the object to attach the leader to.
Arrowhead
Displays a palette of arrowhead styles for both primary and secondary leaders.

All Round Symbol

Specifies whether to place an all round symbol on the leader.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Feature Control Frame dialog
box to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the
properties for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

158 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Modifying Feature Control Frames
When making changes to feature control frames, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a feature control frame with the geometry it

is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a feature control frame to the Windows clipboard, pasting it
back into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a feature control frame into other applications brings it in as a
.wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a feature control frame, the symbol and leader become
unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using
AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

AMFEATID
Creates a feature identifier symbol

Use AMFEATID to a create feature identifier symbol in Drawing mode. Feature

identifier symbols identify or reference feature control frames that establish
acceptable tolerances. They conform to BSI, CSN, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS
International Drafting Standards. DXF group codes are assigned to feature
identifiers and allow complete data exchange.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤
Feature Identifier.
Toolbutton Feature Identifier
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Feature Identifier
Command AMFEATID

Select object to attach: Specify the object

Start Point: Specify a start point
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

AMFEATID | 159
 Feature Identifier Dialog Box

Enter a value for the feature identifier in the available field.

Arrowhead
Displays a palette of arrowhead styles.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Feature Identifier dialog box
to open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control properties
for the current symbol. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Feature Identifier Symbols

When making changes to feature identifier symbols, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a feature identifier symbol with the geometry

it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a feature identifier symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting
it back into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a feature identifier symbol into other applications brings it in as a
.wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a feature identifier symbol, the symbol and leader become
unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using
AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

160 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMFILLET
Creates a smoothly fitted blend with a constant or variable radius between faces

Use AMFILLET to create parametric fillet features between faces on the active
part. You can create constant, fixed width, cubic, and linear fillets with
AMFILLET and edit them at any time using AMEDITFEAT.
If you select multiple edges, the resulting fillets are considered to be one
feature.
Context Menu Right-click the graphics area, and choose Placed Features
➤ Fillet.
Toolbutton Fillet
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Fillet
Command AMFILLET

Fillet Dialog Box

Constant
Creates a constant radius fillet.

AMFILLET | 161
 Radius
Specifies the radius for the fillet.
Select edges: Select edge
Select edges: Select another edge or press ENTER

edge selected fillet created

NOTE The prompts appear when you choose OK in the Fillet dialog box.

Individual Radii Override

Specifies individual radius values for each selected edge.
Select edges: Select edge
Select edges: Select another edge or press ENTER
Select radius: Select radius to override
Enter radius <0.2500>: Specify a new value
Select radius: Select another radius or press ENTER

R=0.75 R =0.25

R=0.25

edges selected and radius changed fillets created

NOTE The three fillets are one feature, illustrated by one Fillet icon in the
Desktop Browser.

162 | Chapter 1 Commands

Fixed Width
Creates a fillet with a fixed chord length.
Select edge: Select an edge

edge selected fillet created

Cubic
Creates a variable radius fillet with a gradual blending transition between
two radii that you specify on screen.
Select edge: Select an edge
Select radius or [Add vertex/Clear/Delete vertex]:
Choose an option or select a radius

Select Radius
Specifies a value for the selected radius.
Enter radius <0.5000>: Specify a value
Select radius: Select another radius or press ENTER

Add Vertex
Adds a vertex to the selected line.
Select location on edge: Specify a location on the selected edge
Enter vertex placement <59.3922%>: Specify a value or press ENTER

Clear
Removes the current value from the selected radius.
Select radius to clear: Select a radius

AMFILLET | 163
 Delete
Deletes a selected radius.
Select radius to delete: Specify a radius to delete

R=0.5

R=1.0

edge selected and radii specified fillet created

Linear
Creates a variable radius fillet with a linear transition between two radii that
you specify on screen.
Select edge: Select an edge
Select radius: Select a radius
Enter radius <0.5000>: Specify a value
Select radius: Select another radius

R=0.5

R=1.0

edge selected and radii specified fillet created

AMFILLET3D
Creates a smoothly fitted arc of constant radius between wires

Use AMFILLET3D to create a fillet between two wires. Valid wires are coplanar
polylines, lines, arcs, ellipses, circles, splines, and elliptical arcs. The fillet is
independent of the objects it joins.
Use AMFILLET3D to fillet 3D objects received through the Initial Graphics
Exchange Specification (IGES) and other translators of mechanical CAD draw-
ings. AMFILLET3D requires no manipulation of the UCS. It creates the fillet on
the plane defined by the intersection of the objects.

164 | Chapter 1 Commands

Toolbutton Fillet Wire
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Fillet
Command AMFILLET3D

Radius=0.5000 Trim=Both
Select first object or [Radius/Trim]: Choose an option or select the first wire
Radius=0.5000 Trim=Both
Select second object or [Radius/Trim]: Choose an option or select the second wire

Select First Object

Selects the first wire.

Select Second Object

Selects the second wire. This wire must be on the same plane as the first wire.

Radius
Specifies the value for the fillet radius.
Enter Radius <0.5000>: Specify a fillet radius

Trim
Specifies whether the wires are trimmed.
Enter trim option [First/Second/None/Both] <Both>: Choose an option
First
Trims only the first wire selected.
Second
Trims only the second wire selected.
None
Does not trim either wire.
Both
Trims both wires.

AMFILLET3D | 165
AMFILLETSF
Creates a fillet surface along the intersection of two surfaces

Use AMFILLETSF to create an arc-shaped surface of variable or constant radius

that is independent of the selected surfaces it joins. One or both of the
selected surfaces can be trimmed to the fillet tangent.
AMFILLETSF solves problems in manufacturing by rounding the edges of prod-
ucts with sharp corners.
Toolbutton Fillet Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Fillet
Command AMFILLETSF

Select first surface: Specify a surface

Select second surface: Specify another surface

Fillet Surface Dialog Box

NOTE The image tile varies, depending on the type of fillet you choose.

Trim
Determines which surfaces, if any, to trim.
First Surface
Selects the first surface to trim.

166 | Chapter 1 Commands

Second Surface
Selects the second surface to trim.

NOTE Surfaces are trimmed in the order in which you selected them. The trim
occurs tangent to the selected surfaces.

Fillet Type
Determines the type of fillet to create. If neither the Variable nor Extended
options are selected, a constant radius fillet is created.

constant radius fillet

Variable
Creates a fillet with a variable radius. You can choose to create either a linear
or a cubic fillet. Use the Radii options to set the radii values.

variable linear fillet variable cubic fillet

Extended
Extends the fillet past the first surface to the end of the second surface, usu-
ally maintaining a rolling ball fillet. If you do not select the Extended option,
the fillet surface is terminated at the end of the shortest surface.

fillet not extended fillet extended

AMFILLETSF | 167
 Base Surface
Creates a fillet to the base edges rather than the trim edges. This option is
available only when at least one of the input surfaces is trimmed.

fillet created to base surfaces

Linear
Creates a linear blend between the two edges of a variable fillet.
Cubic
Creates a cubic blend between the two edges of a variable fillet.

Radii
Sets the size of the fillet surface.

NOTE If you choose the Variable option, First Edge is displayed instead of the
Fillet Radius option. In this case, the value given determines the radius of the first
edge in the variable radius fillet.

Fillet Radius
Displays the current value of the AutoCAD system variable FILLETRAD. Enter
a different value to change the size of the constant radius.
First Edge
Determines the radius of the first edge in a variable radius fillet. This option
is available only when you have selected the Variable option.
Second Edge
Determines the radius of the second edge in a variable radius fillet. This
option is available only when you have selected the Variable option.

168 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMFITSPLINE
Smooths wire objects by fitting them with a smooth NURBS spline

Use AMFITSPLINE to create splines from polylines, circles, ellipses, and arcs,
retaining the properties of the original wires. You can set the tolerance or the
number of control points for the spline. AMFITSPLINE previews the results
until you find the smoothest spline with the smallest number of control
points.
In certain industries, digitized data is the basis for creating surface models.
Often, the digitized data is received as 3D polylines that are not smooth, even
though they have hundreds of vertices. Use AMFITSPLINE in these situations
to convert the polylines into smooth NURBS splines that can be used to
create smooth surfaces.
Toolbutton Create Spline
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Spline Fit
Command AMFITSPLINE

Select wires: Select a wire

Select wires: Select another wire or press ENTER

Fit Spline Dialog Box

Fit Mode
Determines the type of fit for the spline.
Tolerance
Creates a spline using the maximum chordal deviation between the resulting
spline and the vertices of the input polyline.

AMFITSPLINE | 169
 When you specify a tolerance, AMFITSPLINE floats a smooth 3D spline through
the selected polyline using the least squares approximation method to produce
a spline with fewer control points. This method decreases inflections in the
curvature and increases deviations in fit between the spline and the polyline.
To reduce the inflections in the overall shape of a dense polyline, enter a
loose (high) tolerance. To give a sparse polyline more shape, enter a tight
(low) tolerance.
If the Fit Tolerance setting does not provide the results you want, loosen the
setting a little more, and check the Average Error again. Repeat these steps
until you’re successful.
Changing the value of this option does not change the default Fit Tolerance,
which is based on the AMPFITTOL system variable.
Control Points
Creates a spline using a specified number of control points.
For example, use this option on a 3D polyline that was produced by scanning
a physical model that has hundreds of points that vary only a few thousandths
of an inch from a theoretically smooth line. This method produces a spline
with relatively few control points, compared to the original polyline.
To reduce the inflections in the overall shape, select a dense polyline and
enter a small number of control points. To give the polyline more shape,
select a sparse polyline and enter a large number of control points.
The accuracy of the fit is affected by the number of control points you enter,
so check the Max Deviation and Average Error values when using this option.
Using control points to fit a spline to a polyline precludes using a tolerance.

Spline Attributes
Defines the attributes for the new spline.
Tolerance
Determines the allowable tolerance for a Tolerance Fit. If you choose to create
the spline from control points, this field changes to allow you to specify the
number of control points to use.
Order
Sets the default order of a curve for generating splines. The order of a curve
is 1, plus the highest-numbered exponent in the defining polynomial equa-
tion. Generally, order 4 is used to generate a spline with C2 continuity.

NOTE If the order is 2, multiple 2-point splines are created. A warning regard-
ing length and angle is displayed. Changing the order to a number greater than
4 may produce undesirable inflections and oscillations in the spline.

170 | Chapter 1 Commands

Break Length
Sets the value of AMPFITLEN, which holds a portion of a polyline flat in the
resulting spline. This setting is available only with order 4 splines. Use the
button to the right of this field to preview your setting.

If the setting of AMPFITLEN creates more than one spline, a Warning dialog
box is displayed when you attempt to create the spline.

Choose cancel to abort creation of the spline.

Break Angle
Sets the value of AMPFITANG, which holds sharp corners of the polyline in the
resulting spline. This setting is available only with order 4 splines. Use the
button to the right of this field to preview your setting.

If setting AMPFITANG will create more than one spline, a Warning dialog box
is displayed when you attempt to create the spline. To abort creation of the
spline, choose Cancel.
Close
Creates a closed spline that is tangentially continuous at the closing point,
even if the original polyline was not closed.

AMFITSPLINE | 171
 Spline Fit Results
Displays the results of fitting the polyline to the spline. If you selected more
than one polyline, the results are not available.
Control Points
Shows the density of the newly created spline. Try to fit your input data to
the spline by lowering the number of control points, while maintaining a
close fit to your original data.
Max Deviation
Shows the maximum chordal deviation between the input polyline and the
spline.
Tangency Break
Shows the number of points in the curve with C1 continuity.
Curvature Break
Shows the number of breaks necessary to avoid creating a curve with C0
continuity.

Preview
Previews your settings on screen. C1 tangent points are displayed in the
GRIPCOLOR, and C0 breaks are displayed in the GRIPHOT color.

AMFLOW
Creates flow wires in the U and V directions

Use AMFLOW to create 3D polylines or augmented lines and display them on

the surface in the U or V direction, or in both directions, or on C1 tangencies.
Flow wires of a trimmed surface begin and end at the surface borders and follow
the contours of the base surface.
Flow lines created by AMFLOW are different from surface display lines, which
you control with AMDISPSF. Surface display lines are U and V lines that make
the surface visible, whereas flow lines are actual 3D polylines that reside on
the surface. By examining flow wires, you can verify the quality of the surface.
Flow lines are sometimes used in manufacturing to generate tool paths.
Toolbutton Flow Wires
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Flow
Command AMFLOW

Select surfaces to define flow lines: Select a surface

Select surfaces to define flow lines: Select another surface or press ENTER

172 | Chapter 1 Commands

Surface Flow Lines Dialog Box

Flow Type
Establishes the direction of the flow wires.
U/V Wires
Creates flow wires in the U or V direction or in both directions of the surface.
If you set either U wires or V wires to 0, no flow wires are created in that direc-
tion of the surface.
C1 Tangents
Creates flow wires along the C1 tangencies of a surface. This option is available
only if you selected a surface that has C1 areas.

Preview
Closes the Surface Flow Lines dialog box temporarily and displays a preview
of the flow lines on your surface in the GRIPCOLOR.

U Wires
Sets the number of U wires to create. Enter a number in the edit field or accept
the default. Enter 0 to display no wires of this type.

V Wires
Sets the number of V wires. Enter a number in the edit field or accept the
default. Enter 0 to display no wires of this type.

NOTE To shorten the time it takes to display a preview, set U wires and V wires
to a low setting.

AMFLOW | 173
 Augmented
Creates flow wires as augmented lines. Internally, all added vectors are one
unit of measurement in length, but they are displayed according to the value
of AMVECAUG.

original surface augmented flow wires created

Offset
Creates flow wires offset a given distance in a direction normal to the surface.
A positive offset value offsets the flow wires in the same direction as the
surface normal. A negative offset value offsets the flow wires in the opposite
direction of the surface normal. Use this option to create tool paths to cut
more or less material than the designed surface

NOTE The offset flow wires are not the same size as the original surface.

positive offset negative offset

Save
Changes the status of flow wires from temporary to permanent by incorpo-
rating them in to the drawing database. If you do not choose Save, flow wires
are erased when the drawing is redrawn.

Group
Sets the name of the group that stores flow wires. Enter the group prefix in
the list box, or accept the default prefix. Having flow wires in a group simpli-
fies accessing them.
For example, to modify flow wires to create a tool path, you can select all the
flow wires in the group, move the flow wires away from the surface, turn off the
selectable feature of groups, and select just a few flow wires for modification.

174 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMFLUSH
Creates a parallel constraint at a specified offset between two planes

Use AMFLUSH to create a parallel assembly constraint between two planes.

You can also specify an offset. Because assembly constraints are fully para-
metric, you can modify their parameters at any time.

planes selected flush constraint created

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D

Constraints ➤ Flush.
Toolbutton Flush
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Flush
Command AMFLUSH

Select first set of geometry: Select the first plane

First set = Plane
Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second set of geometry: Select the second plane
Second set = Plane
Enter an option [Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle] <accept>:
Choose an option or press ENTER
Enter offset <0.0000>: Specify an offset or press ENTER

Clear
Clears the current selection.

Next
Toggles the next available geometry: an axis, a face, or a point.

Flip
Flips the direction of the normal.

AMFLUSH | 175
 Cycle
Cycles through available geometry.

Using the Animated Cursor

Use the animated cursor to automate the selection process when you create
constraints.

Cycling
When the cursor appears with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button
to cycle through available options. Use the right mouse button to accept your
selection.

Flipping
When the cursor appears with directional arrows, use the left mouse button
to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the
command prompts.

AMHOLE
Creates drilled, counterbored, or countersunk holes that may be terminated on planar faces

Use AMHOLE to create hole features on planar faces. Types of holes include
drilled, counterbore, and countersink. The holes are fully parametric and can
be edited at any time.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Hole.
Toolbutton Hole
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Hole
Command AMHOLE

drilled counterbore countersink

176 | Chapter 1 Commands

Hole Feature Dialog Box

NOTE The image tile changes to illustrate the type of hole you have selected.
Use this image to understand how the hole will be created.

Copy Values
Copies the values of an existing hole feature.
Select hole to copy values from: Specify a hole feature

Operation
Specifies the type of hole.
Drilled
Creates a simple, drilled hole.
C’Bore
Creates a counterbore hole.
C’Sink
Creates a countersink hole.

Termination
Specifies where the hole feature ends.
Through
Creates a hole that passes completely through the part.

AMHOLE | 177
 To-Plane
Creates a hole that terminates at a selected plane.
Blind
Creates a hole that ends inside the part at a specified depth.

Placement
Specifies how the hole will be located on the part.
2 Edges
Places the hole at a specified distance from two selected edges.
Select the first edge: Select the first edge
Select the second edge: Select the second edge
Specify the hole location: Specify a location point
Enter distance from first edge (highlighted) <10.0502>: Specify a distance
Enter distance from second edge (highlighted) <10.6066>: Specify a distance
Select the first edge: Select an edge or press ENTER to exit

Concentric
Places the hole concentric to a selected circular edge.
Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select concentric edge: Select a circular edge
Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option to place another hole, or press ENTER to exit

On Point
Places the hole on a selected work point.
Select work point for the hole location: Select a work point
Specify direction or [Accept/Flip] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select work point for the hole location:
Select a work point for another hole, or press ENTER to exit

178 | Chapter 1 Commands

From Hole
Places the hole at a specified x and y distance from existing holes on a speci-
fied plane.
Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Specify the orientation for the hole placement.
Select edge to align X axis [Rotate]:
Enter r to rotate the X axis 90 degrees, or select a work axis or a straight edge
Select edge to align X axis [Rotate]: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select hole for the X direction reference: Select a hole
Select hole for the Y direction reference or <previous>:
Select a hole or press ENTER
Specify the hole location: Specify a location
Enter the X distance <11.3934>: Specify a value
Enter the Y distance <3.3165>: Specify a value
Select work plane or planar face [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option to place another hole, or press ENTER to exit

Tapped
Specifies thread information for tapped holes.
Major Dia
Specifies the diameter for the threads.
Full Thread Depth
Specifies whether the threads run the length of the hole.
Depth
Specifies the depth for the threads if they do not run full length.

Drill Size
Controls the depth, diameter, and point angle of the drill used to create the
hole.
Dia
Specifies the diameter of the hole.
Depth
Specifies the depth of the hole. Available only with termination type Blind.
PT Angle
Specifies the point angle for a hole that terminates inside the part. Available
with termination types Blind and To Plane.

AMHOLE | 179
 C’bore/Sunk Size
Controls counterbore and countersink depth and size. Available only if a
counterbore or countersink hole has been specified.
C’Dia
Specifies the diameter for the counterbore or countersink.
C’Depth
Specifies the depth for the counterbore.
C’Angle
Specifies the angle for the countersink.

AMHOLENOTE
Creates custom diameter, depth, and angle information for standard hole notes

Use AMHOLENOTE in Drawing mode to create or edit annotations for hole

features on your parts.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation

➤ Hole Note.
Toolbutton Hole Note
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Annotation ➤ Hole Note
Command AMHOLENOTE

Enter an option [Edit/New] <New>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Select hole feature: Select a valid edge on a hole feature

180 | Chapter 1 Commands

Create Holenote Dialog Box
If you are editing an existing holenote, the Edit Holenote dialog box is
displayed. It contains the same options as the Create Holenote dialog box.

Template Name
Displays available holenote template names. Select the template to use.

Leader Justification
Controls the placement of the holenote leader. Valid options are

■ Middle of top line

■ Middle of all text
■ Middle of bottom line

AMHOLENOTE | 181
 Edit Template
Opens the Multiline Text Editor dialog box. The selected template consists of
variables used by Mechanical Desktop to control the values for the dimen-
sions that appear in the holenote. These variables are
AMDIA Controls the diameter of the hole.
AMDEP Controls the depth of the hole.
AMCDIA Controls the diameter of a countersink or counterbore.
AMCSANGLE Controls the angle of a countersink.
AMCBDEP Controls the depth of a counterbore.

NOTE Precede the variable name with %% to instruct the Multiline Text
Editor that it is a variable. Otherwise, only the variable name appears in the
holenote.

Use the Multiline Text Editor to modify the information you want included
when the holenote is created. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more infor-
mation about using the Multiline Text Editor.

Dimension Style Overrides

Opens the Holenote Dimension Style Overrides dialog box, which controls
the dimension style, precision, and type of measurement for individual
expressions in the holenote.

dimension style overrides

182 | Chapter 1 Commands

Primary Dimension Style
Controls the primary dimension style to apply to the holenote. This style will
be used by any expression that does not have an override applied to it.

primary dimension style applied

Apply Dimension Style to Text Height Only

Controls whether to apply the dimension style to the text height only or to
the entire holenote. The current dimension style is indicated in the field
below the check box. Select a defined dimension style from the list.

Holenote Dimension Style Overrides Dialog Box

Expression
Lists the expressions in the current holenote.

Precision
Controls the precision for each expression in the holenote. Select the value
you want to override, and select a value from the list.

Apply Dimstyle
Controls the dimension style for the selected expression.

AMHOLENOTE | 183
 Measurement Type
Controls the type of measurement for the selected expression.

Dimension Style
Controls the dimension style for the selected expression.

AMIDFIN
Reads printed circuit board (PCB) data in the Intermediate Data Format (IDF) and
converts it to AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects

Use AMIDFIN to read PCB data into the current drawing. AMIDFIN reads PCB
data in IDF and translates it into AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop objects.
Desktop Menu Insert ➤ IDF
Command AMIDFIN

Autodesk IDF Translator Dialog Box

Board File
Opens the Board File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box
to locate the board file (*.brd) you want to import.

Library File
Opens the Library File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box
to locate the library file (*.lib) you want to import.

184 | Chapter 1 Commands

Options File
Opens the Options File Defaults/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog
box to locate the options file (*.opt) you want to import.

Edit Options
Opens the Autodesk IDF Translator - Edit IDFIN Options dialog box. Use this
dialog box to respecify the colors and layers to use for IDF components.

Edit IDFIN Options Dialog Box

Color
Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. Specifies a color to use for the
highlighted component.

Layer
Opens the Layer Rename dialog box. Specifies a layer to use for the high-
lighted component.

Save As
Opens the Save Options to File/IDF Translator dialog box. Use this dialog box
to specify the location and file name of the options file (*.opt) that you want
to save.

AMIDFIN | 185
AMINSERT
Creates a constraint to make two circular edges share the same axis and to make their
planes coplanar

Use AMINSERT to create an assembly constraint between two parts with circular
edges, or faces. AMINSERT constrains the parts by making the selected edges or
faces share the same axis, while forcing their faces coplanar.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D
Constraints ➤ Insert.
Toolbutton Insert
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Insert
Command AMINSERT

Select first circular edge: Select the first edge

First set = Plane/Axis
Enter an option [Clear/Flip] <accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second circular edge: Select the second edge
Second set = Plane/Axis
Enter an option [Clear/Flip]: Choose an option or press ENTER
Offset <0.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

edges selected insert constraint created

Clear
Clears the current selection.

Flip
Flips the direction of the normal.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the
command prompts.

186 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Using the Animated Cursor
The animated cursor can be used to automate the selection process when you
are creating constraints.

Cycling
When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse
button to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to
accept your selection.

Flipping
When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse
button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMINTERFERE
Checks for interference between parts in an assembly or a combined part file

Use AMINTERFERE to check for interference between parts in an assembly or

in a combined part file. AMINTERFERE analyzes the position of the selected
parts and returns information about any interference found.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Analysis ➤
Check Interference.
Toolbutton Check Interference
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Analysis ➤ Check Interference
Command AMINTERFERE

Nested part or subassembly selection? [Yes/No] <No>:

Enter y to check nested parts and subassemblies, or press ENTER

No
Selects multiple parts and subassemblies. Nested parts or subassemblies
within the selected objects are ignored.
Select first set of parts or subassemblies
Select first part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly
Select first part or subassembly:
Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER
Select second set of parts or subassemblies
Select the second part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly
Select the second part or subassembly:
Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER
Comparing n parts/subassemblies against n parts/subassemblies.

AMINTERFERE | 187
 Yes
Moves you into a specific subassembly to compare nested parts.
Select first set of parts or subassemblies
Select first part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly
Instance = SUB1_1
Enter an option [Down/Next/Accept] <Accept>:
Choose an option, or press ENTER
Select first part or subassembly:
Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER
Select second set of parts or subassemblies
Select the second part or subassembly: Select a part or subassembly
(Instance SPACER_1)
Enter an option [Down/Next/Accept] <Accept>:
Choose an option, or press ENTER
Select the second part or subassembly:
Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER

Down
Moves down one level in the assembly to change your selection to a subas-
sembly or a part lower in the tree.
Next
Cycles through the parts or subassemblies in the selection.
Up
Moves up one level in the assembly to change your selection to a subassembly
or a part higher in the tree.

Interferences Found
If interferences are found, information is displayed on the command line.
Interference 1:
PART1_1
PART2_1
Create interference solids? [Yes/No] <No>: Choose an option
Highlight pairs of interfering parts/subassemblies? [Yes/No] <No>:
Choose an option

No Interferences Found
If no interferences are found, a message is displayed on the command line.
Parts/Subassemblies do not interfere.

188 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMINTERSF
Intersects two surfaces and creates a 3D polyline at the intersection

Use AMINTERSF to create a curve of intersection between two intersecting

surfaces, to terminate one surface at another surface.
In product and tooling design, oversized four-sided surfaces are usually
created to capture the part contours. AMINTERSF is used to create trimmed
surfaces, based on intersections with neighboring surfaces.
Offset intersections are used to create tool paths and trim off tool path
interference or collisions to a neighboring surface.

intersecting surfaces one surface trimmed both surfaces trimmed

NOTE Results of AMINTERSF may be incorrect if surfaces intersect at a point or

line of tangency.

Toolbutton Intersect and Trim

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Intersect Trim
Command AMINTERSF

Select first surface: Select the first surface

Select second surface: Select the second surface

Surface Intersection Dialog Box

AMINTERSF | 189
 Intersection
Specifies whether a 3D polyline is created along the intersection.
Polyline
Creates a 3D polyline along the intersection of the selected surfaces.

Trim
Controls trimming of the input surfaces.
First Surface
Cuts the first surface at the intersection, extending the line of intersection, if
necessary. The base surface is hidden but retained.
Second Surface
Trims the second selected surface.

NOTE Surfaces are trimmed in the same order in which you select them.

AMJOIN3D
Joins wires to form one 3D polyline, spline, or augmented line

Use AMJOIN3D to create a polyline, spline, or augmented line by joining any

combination of lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, augmented lines, splines, and
polylines. The direction of input wires can vary. AMJOIN3D controls the direc-
tion of the new object resulting from the joined wires. Arcs, circles, ellipses,
and splines are exploded before being joined. The new object inherits the
properties, including group membership, of the first wire you select.
Use this command to combine parts of your wireframe model into a single
wireframe object.
Toolbutton Join Wire
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Join
Command AMJOIN3D

190 | Chapter 1 Commands

Join 3D Dialog Box

Mode
Specifies whether objects are joined, without regard for their proximity to
each other.
Manual
Joins selected wires, regardless of how far apart they are.
Automatic
Joins selected wires if they are not too far apart, as determined by the Gap
Tolerance setting.

Output
Determines the type of object produced by joining wires.
Polyline
Creates a polyline.
Spline
Creates a spline.
Aug Line
Creates an augmented line. If either of the input wires has vectors, the new
augmented line inherits them. If neither of the input wires has vectors, the
vectors of the new augmented line are normal to the curve in the plane of
the display.

Gap
Sets the AMJOINGAP system variable, the default gap tolerance. If the Gap
setting is greater than the 3D distance between the selected wires, they are
joined.
Set the gap tolerance to the greatest acceptable distance between wires.

AMJOIN3D | 191
 OK
Choose OK to continue.
Select start wire: Select the first wire
Select wire to join: Select the second wire
Select wire to join: Select another wire or press ENTER
Reverse direction? [Yes/No] <No>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Yes
Reverses the direction of the output object.
No
Does not reverse the direction of the output object.

AMJOINSF
Joins two or more surfaces at their untrimmed base edges into one continuous surface

Use AMJOINSF to join adjacent surfaces to create a single surface. Joining

surfaces with AMJOINSF also reduces file size by decreasing the number of
surfaces in a model.
Surfaces are joined in the order selected and at adjacent edges, regardless of
where you selected the surfaces.
Toolbutton Join Surfaces
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Join
Command AMJOINSF

Select surfaces to join: Select the first surface (1)

Select surfaces to join: Select another surface (2)
Select surfaces to join: Select another surface or press ENTER

1
2

Joining Mismatched Surfaces

When surfaces don’t match at their edges AMJOINSF attempts to resolve the
mismatch by blending. The AMBLENDTOL system variable controls how
much of the surface is blended. The total area that AMJOINSF blends is twice
the value of AMBLENDTOL.

192 | Chapter 1 Commands

 NOTE AMJOINSF joins only untrimmed base edges of a surface.

If the edges of the surfaces that are being joined are not tangent, a small
amount of the original surface definitions are altered to create a smooth
blend between the two surfaces. The AMBLENDTOL system variable defines
how many of the surface definitions are used to create the smooth blend. If
the edges of the two surfaces are adjacent, the endpoints of the edges must
be coincident.
If the edges of the two surfaces are not adjacent, the endpoints of the edges
do not have to be coincident.
If the gap between the edges of two surfaces is greater than 2 X AMBLENDTOL,
then AMJOINSF creates a smooth blend that fills the gap between the two
edges. In this situation, AMBLENDTOL does not affect the output surface.
AMJOINSF blends only between the edges.
If the gap between the edges of two surfaces is less than 2 X AMBLENDTOL,
AMJOINSF alters the original surface definitions so that a smooth blend can
be created. The amount by which the surface definition is altered is equal to
AMBLENDTOL for each surface.

Joining Trimmed Surfaces

A common problem in joining surfaces that have been trimmed is assuming
that the surface edge you are viewing is the actual base edge of the surface.
AMJOINSF joins only base surfaces, not their interior trim edges. You can use
AMDISPSF to display the base surfaces to be sure which surfaces you’re joining.

AMLEGIBLE
Creates 2D entities representing parts and assemblies in drawing views

Use AMLEGIBLE to create 2D entities that represent parts and assemblies in

drawing views. AMLEGIBLE creates 2D geometry that lies directly over part
edges in Drawing mode.
The 2D entities can be used to

■ Calculate moments of inertia from drawing views.

■ Generate shafts.
■ Export 2D representations of your model to a separate drawing file.

Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Legible Entities

Command AMLEGIBLE

AMLEGIBLE | 193
 Legible Entities Dialog Box

Mode
Controls legible entities.
Create
Creates legible entities for one or more drawing views.
Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all):
Specify a drawing view or press ENTER

Update
Updates legible entities in one or more drawing views.
Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all):
Specify a drawing view or press ENTER

Highlight
Highlights legible entities in a selected view. Creates a selection set of all
highlighted entities.
Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all):
Specify a drawing view or press ENTER

Remove
Deletes legible entities from one or more drawing views.
Select/Pick viewport (Press RETURN for all):
Specify a drawing view or press ENTER

194 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Export/Copy
Exports selected drawing views, annotations, and legible entities to an external
drawing file.
Select objects: Specify a drawing view border, an annotation, or a legible entity
Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER

Objects
Controls which objects are used to create legible entities.
All
Creates legible entities from all possible objects.
Contour
Creates legible entities from the contour lines of the parts in selected drawing
views. This option is always selected.
Hidden Lines
Creates legible entities from hidden lines.
Centerlines
Creates legible entities from centerlines. Available only when exporting
legible entities.
Hatches
Creates legible entities from hatch patterns.
Dimensions/Symbols
Creates legible entities from dimensions and symbols. Available only when
exporting legible entities.

AMLENGTHEN
Extends or shortens base surface edges by a percentage or distance

Use AMLENGTHEN to add tangent-continuous rows of surface patches to

extend the original surface. The original portion of the surface remains the
same. The added patches follow the flow and contour of the original surface.
AMLENGTHEN extends only the base edges of the surface. If the trimmed
edges of the surface are the same as the base surface, the trimmed edges are
changed. If the trimmed edges of the surface are inside the base surface, the
trimmed surface does not change, but the base surface does.
You can shorten a base surface with AMLENGTHEN. After shortening, any trim
that remains is truncated, and subsequent lengthening of the surface does
not replace the original trim.

AMLENGTHEN | 195
 For product and tooling design, such as managing runoff in dies and binder
surfaces, AMLENGTHEN

■ Extends surfaces to an intersection for interference checking and creates

tool paths for lead-in.
■ Stretches a short surface to the required size, rather than editing the
underlying geometry.
■ Creates a common intersection line between three filleted surfaces by
stretching the surfaces in preparation for creating a blended corner surface
with AMCORNER.
■ Resizes all base edges of a surface so that you can project geometry onto
another smaller surface.

Toolbutton Lengthen Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Lengthen
Command AMLENGTHEN

Base edge=Single Extension=Percent Method=Parabolic Value=110.0000%

Select surface edge or [Base edge/Extension/Method/Value]:
Choose an option or select a surface edge

original surface surface lengthened 30%

Select Surface Edge

Extends the selected surface edge according to the current settings of Extension,
Method, and Value. Value is either a delta distance or a percentage, depending
on the setting of the Extension option.
The default setting extends surfaces by 110 percent, so as soon as you enter
AMLENGTHEN and select a surface edge, it is lengthened by 10 percent. You
can rapidly extend the same edge to the length you want by repeatedly
selecting the same edge.

Base Edge
Lengthens a surface by extending its base edges, either individually or all at
once.
Enter base edge type [All/Single] <All>: Choose an option

196 | Chapter 1 Commands

Extension
Specifies the method of extending a surface (either by a percentage or by a
fixed delta distance).
Enter extension type [Delta/Percent] <Delta>: Choose an option

Percent
Extends the surface by a percentage of the existing surface. If you enter 110,
the surface is extended by 10 percent. If you enter 50, the surface is reduced
to half its original size.
Enter percent <110.0000%>: Specify a value

Delta
Extends the surface by a specified distance measured along the surface contour,
rather than an axis. Entering a negative distance reduces the surface.
Enter delta <1.0000>: Specify a value

Method
Extends the surface using a linear transition or a parabolic transition.
Enter method [Linear/Parabolic] <Linear>: Choose an option

linear extension parabolic extension

Linear
Creates a straight extension tangent to the selected surface edge.
Parabolic
Creates an extension that follows the curvature of the original surface. The
curvature is continuous, and its distance cannot exceed the original surface
length.

Value
Determines how much the surface is extended or shortened. The surface is
extended by either a certain distance or by a percentage, depending on the
setting of the Extension option.

AMLENGTHEN | 197
AMLISTASSM
Returns information about part instances

Use AMLISTASSM in Model mode to get information about a part or set of

parts, including the part name, definition name, degrees of freedom, and a
list of attributes assigned to the part.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤
Query.
Toolbutton List Part Data
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Query
Command AMLISTASSM

Enter an option (parts or subassemblies) [Name/Select] <Select>:

Enter n to specify a part/subassembly name, or select a part/subassembly screen

Select
Specifies a part or subassembly by selecting it on screen.
Select part and subassembly instances: Select a part or subassembly
Select part and subassembly instances:
Select another part or subassembly, or press ENTER

Name
Specifies a part or subassembly.
Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]:
Specify a name or enter ? for a list of parts in the drawing
Enter part or subassembly instance name or [?]:
Specify another name or press ENTER

198 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMLISTPART
Displays part, feature, and view information

Use AMLISTPART in Model mode to display information about parts and

features in a text window.
Toolbutton List Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ List Part
Command AMLISTPART

Select feature to be listed [aCtive part/All parts/Feature]:

Choose an option or select a part

Select a Part
Displays information about the selected part.

Feature
Displays information about selected features (parent), dependent features
(children), or all features.
Select the feature to be listed: Select a part feature
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER
Enter an option [Children/List/Parents] <List>: Select an option

List
Displays information about the selected feature.
Children
Displays information about the dependent features associated with the
selected feature.
Parents
Displays information about the parent feature of the selected feature.

Active Part
Displays information about the active part.

All Parts
Displays information about all parts in the drawing.

AMLISTPART | 199
AMLISTVIEW
Lists view information in a text window

Use AMLISTVIEW in Drawing mode to obtain information about a selected

view. AMLISTVIEW lists the type of drawing view, view directions, center point
of the view, name of the visible layer, names of hidden layers, number of
dependent views, dimensions and notes, and how many parts are represented
in the view.
Toolbutton List Drawing
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ List Drawing
Command AMLISTVIEW

Select view: Specify a drawing view

AMLOCKSCENE
Locks the position of part instances on a scene-by-scene basis

Use AMLOCKSCENE to lock and unlock the existing positions of all parts in a
scene. This command is available in Scene mode only. When a scene is
locked, changes cannot be made to the explosion factor of the scene or indi-
vidual parts, and tweaks cannot be added or modified.
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click the scene icon and choose
Lock Position.
Command AMLOCKSCENE

Enter an option [Lock/Unlock] <Lock>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Unlock
Unlocks a scene.

Lock
Locks a scene. A small lock appears beside the scene icon in the browser.

200 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMLOFT
Creates a solid shape through profiles

Use AMLOFT to create a complex, solid shape by blending it through a set of

planar closed loops or sections. The closed loops can be defined using any of
the following:

■ Profiles
■ Planar face loops
■ A work point

linear loft cubic loft

Context Menu In the graphics area, choose Sketched & Work Features ➤
Loft.
Toolbutton Loft
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Loft
Command AMLOFT

Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify a profile or face

Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify another profile or face
Select profiles or planar faces to loft or [Redefine sections]:
Specify another profile or face, enter r to redefine sections, or press ENTER to
continue

Redefine
Returns to the first prompt so that you can redefine the sections to loft.

AMLOFT | 201
 Loft Dialog Box

Operation
Controls how the loft will be used.
Base
Creates a loft that becomes the base feature of the active part. If a base feature
already exists, this operation is not available. If a base feature does not exist,
this operation is the default. Other operations are not available.
Join
Joins the loft to the base feature.
Cut
Cuts the loft from the base feature.
Intersect
Creates a new feature from the intersection between the loft and the base
feature.
Split
Splits the base feature, using the loft.

Termination
Controls how the loft is created.
Sections
Creates the loft using profiled sections.
To Face
Creates the loft to an existing face.
From to
Creates the loft from one existing face to another existing face.

202 | Chapter 1 Commands

Type
Controls the type of loft.
Linear
Creates a linear transition between two defined sections or faces.
Cubic
Creates gradual blends between defined sections or faces.
Closed Cubic
Creates gradual blends between defined sections along a closed path.

Minimize Twist
Controls the alignment of sections in a loft feature. When selected, deter-
mines the best location for the placement of the start point, to minimize the
twisting of the loft.

Sections to Loft
Provides options to redefine, reorder, and delete sections and to control the
start points of sections, to minimize twist.
Redefine
Redefines the sections to use in the loft.
Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify a profile or face
Select profiles or planar faces to loft: Specify another profile or face
Select profiles or planar faces to loft or [Redefine sections]:
Specify another profile or face, enter r to redefine sections, or press ENTER to
continue

Start Points
Controls the placement of the start points of the loft, to control twist.
Specify start points or [preView/Restore default]:
Choose an option or specify a new point

Preview Provides a preview of the loft.

Restore Default Restores the default start point of selected sections.
Select sections or [All]: Enter a or specify a section
Select sections: Specify another section or press ENTER

Reorder
Reorders the selected sections or planar faces.
Delete
Removes the selected sections or planar faces.

AMLOFT | 203
 Start Section
Controls the start section of the loft.
Tangent to Adjacent Faces
Forces the loft tangent to the adjacent faces of the start face; available only if
the start section of the loft is a planar face.
Angle
Controls the takeoff angle at the start section of the loft; not available if the
Tangent to Face option is selected.
Weight
Controls how long the loft follows the Angle or Tangent to Face option
before starting to blend with the next section.

End Section
Controls the end section of the loft.
Tangent to Adjacent Faces
Forces the loft tangent to the adjacent faces of the end face; available only if
the end section of the loft is a planar face.
Angle
Controls the takeoff angle at the end section of the loft; not available if the
Tangent to Face option is selected.
Weight
Controls how long the loft follows the Angle or Tangent to Face option
before starting to blend with the end section.

AMLOFTU
Creates a surface through a set of wires

Use AMLOFTU to construct a surface from a single set of curves (U wires) that
represent how a surface looks at regular intervals. AMLOFTU controls the
continuity and approximate number of internal patches in the surface, which
determines how tightly the input surface fits through the input wire set.

204 | Chapter 1 Commands

The wires may exist as polylines, arcs, lines, augmented lines, elliptical arcs,
circles, ellipses, splines, or surface display lines (isolines or edges). Selected
wires should not cross each other.

wires surface overlaid on wires

The order in which you select wires determines how the surface is built.
Select wires in sequential order; for example, from top to bottom. Avoid
reversing the order of selection to go back to a wire you missed; AMLOFTU
might create a self-intersecting surface.
Toolbutton Loft U Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ LoftU
Command AMLOFTU

Select U wires: Select a wire

Select U wires: Select another wire
Select U wires: Select another wire or press ENTER

Loft Surface Dialog Box

Input Wires
Applies direction control and spline fitting to the wires you select.

AMLOFTU | 205
 Align
Adjusts the direction of selected wires, if necessary, to make them unidirec-
tional. Turn on Align to change the direction of misaligned input wires. Turn
off Align to produce the surface without changing the direction of the
misaligned input wires.

NOTE AMLOFTU does not align closed U wires. Before using AMLOFTU on
closed U wires, check the direction of the wires with AMDIRECTION, and change
the direction, as needed.

Smooth
Fits the surface through the points on the wires using the polyline fit toler-
ance (AMPFITTOL). Choose Smooth to improve the performance (in most
cases) of subsequent operations on the surface. AMLOFTU reduces the
complexity and number of surface patches used to create the surface and
smooths input curves, by the approximation method, according to the
current system tolerance (AMSFTOL).
Smooth makes only a subtle difference when the surface is passed through
the U wires that are within the polyline fit tolerance AMPFITTOL. Changing
the polyline fit tolerance produces a more dramatic effect.

Smooth on Smooth off

Turning off Smooth makes each point of the surface fall directly on the input
curves. The complexity and discontinuity of input curves are maintained
and reflected in the resulting surface. Input curves are smoothed by the inter-
polation method, which fits the input curve exactly, through defining
points, to create the lofted surface.

Curve Ends Fit

Forms the two V edges of the surface from the ends of each input curve.
Defines the surface edge by smoothly fitting the ends of all the input wires.
With parallel (or nearly parallel) input curves, this option creates an acceptable
surface by defining the two edges of the surface from the curve ends because
the ends of parallel input curves can be suitably smoothed.
For better system performance, use the Curve Ends Fit option only with input
polylines that have sparse point spacing, or a limited number of input curves,
or both.

206 | Chapter 1 Commands

Respace
Adjusts poorly proportioned curve ends by fitting the ends of the input
curves exactly. The new fit is less constrained in the V direction but it is better
proportioned overall. With Respace on, a smoother surface can be produced,
but the surface accuracy is degraded slightly, particularly when you select
nonparallel lines.

Respace on Respace off

With Respace off, the surface is fit exactly through the input curve ends to
constrain the curve ends in that direction. Turn off Respace if input curves
are perfectly or almost perfectly proportioned or if you want the effect that
no respacing has on the resulting surface. Input curves are not well propor-
tioned if they’re skewed relative to each other.

Polyline Fit
Displays the Polyline Fit dialog box for changing AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG
system variables.

Polyline Fit Dialog Box

Length Prompt
Measures the length of a given segment in a polyline. Use to determine
which part of the polyline is the shortest.

AMLOFTU | 207
 If Length is Longer than
Sets the AMPFITLEN system variable. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based
on the portion of the polyline you specified at the Length prompt.

Angle Prompt
Measures the angle between two segments in the polyline. Select an angle
that defines the smallest variation in direction allowed before creating a
sharp corner.

If Angle is Less than

Sets the AMPFITANG system variable, which holds sharp corners of the
polyline in the resulting spline, if the angle of the corner is less than the
value you specify. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based on the portion of
the polyline you specified at the Angle prompt.

Fit Tolerance
Displays and specifies a tolerance for fitting a spline through the input
polyline with the least squares approximation method.

AMLOFTUV
Creates a surface through two sets of wires

Use AMLOFTUV to construct C2 surfaces from a set of curves that represents

how a surface looks at regular intervals in the U and V directions. The quality
of a surface is as good as the quality of your input wires and how they intersect
in 3D space. Each set of wires defines the bounds and contours of the surface
in its direction. Check, correct, and refine your input wires, if necessary, before
creating a surface from them.

U and V wires surface created

Valid input wires are lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, splines, augmented lines, or
polylines.

208 | Chapter 1 Commands

Ensure that the wires you enter are

■ Orthogonal curves (each wire in the U set must cross every wire in the V
set at approximate right angles)
■ Consistently spaced (nearly parallel) within the U or V set
■ Not crossing other members of the same set
■ Not sharply inflected

NOTE To simplify selecting the sets of wires, enter f on the command line, and
create a fence selection set.

After you select the sets of wires, AMLOFTUV performs the following:

■ Aligns the wires so that all the U wires go in the same direction and all the
V wires go in the same direction.
■ Fits all input polylines smoothly, according to the settings of the
AMPFITLEN, AMPFITANG, and AMPFITTOL system variables.
■ Examines the intersection of each pair of U and V wires. The intersection
of the two wires may be actual or apparent (not really intersecting in 3D
space).

AMLOFTUV creates a surface that fits as tightly on the input objects as permitted
by the gap tolerance. The smaller the gap tolerance, the greater the number of
unacceptable gaps. Set the AMJOINGAP system variable, which represents the
gap tolerance (gap = n), to the maximum acceptable distance between the U
and V wires.
Toolbutton Loft UV Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ LoftUV
Command AMLOFTUV

Select U wires: Select a wire

Select U wires: Select another wire
Select U wires: Select another wire or press ENTER
Select V wires: Select a wire
Select V wires: Select another wire
Select V wires: Select another wire or press ENTER

If the maximum distance is less than or equal to AMJOINGAP, the surface is

created.

AMLOFTUV | 209
 If the wires do not cross each other in 3D space, AMLOFTUV measures the
distance between the wires and compares the value of the AMJOINGAP system
variable with the maximum distance between the U and V wires at the apparent
intersection. The following prompt is displayed:
Warning - Gap exceeds tolerance (gap=n)
Enter an option [eXit/Loft/Node check] <Loft>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Loft
Averages the distance between the intersecting wires at each place where the
distance exceeds zero, and creates the surface between them.

Node Check
Reexamines the entire input wire set. Each time the gap between a pair of U
and V lines exceeds the value stored in AMJOINGAP, an indicator appears at
the node that needs adjusting.
Warning - Gap exceeds tolerance (gap=n)
Continue? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter n to stop or press ENTER

Look for a pattern. For example, one spline might be below all the others at
almost every intersection.

Exit
Ends the command so that you can check, correct, and refine your input
wires. If the maximum distance seems too great, something may be wrong
with the quality of the input wires.

Correcting and Refining Input Wires

Use the following suggestions to check and refine your input wires:

■ To correct a surface with large deviations at the intersections, try presplining

your input polylines with a loose tolerance to achieve smoothness.
■ Search through the intersections of the U and V wires with the Node
Check option of AMLOFTUV. Look for an inflection such as one spline that
appears below all the others at frequent intersections. Correct the problem
by moving the spline up by the average amount of the deviation at the
intersection.
■ Continue searching and correcting problem wires in this manner. Finally,
re-create the surface. If the surface is still not satisfactory, loosen the
system tolerance until you achieve the desired effect.

210 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMMAKEBASE
Converts the active part into a static base feature

Use AMMAKEBASE to transform the active part into a base feature. Base features
do not contain any of the information used to create them, such as dimensions,
features, locations, primitives, and sizes. Use AMMAKEBASE to reduce the file
size of the completed parts that you are certain will require no further modifi-
cation, such as standard fittings, moldings, and castings.
You can add new features to the static base feature at any time, but you
cannot use AMEDITFEAT to modify it.
Toolbutton Make Base Feature
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Make Base Part
Command AMMAKEBASE

Warning - Drawing view information and ability to edit existing features will be
lost.
Select part to be made into a base or <PART1>: Specify a part or press ENTER
Base part created.

AMMANIPULATOR
Dynamically rotates, copies, and moves parts along selected axes, or freely in 3D space

Use AMMANIPULATOR to dynamically rotate and move parts along selected X,

Y, and Z axes, or freely in 3D space.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click, and choose 3D
Manipulator.
Toolbutton 3D Manipulator
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Manipulator
Command AMMANIPULATOR

Select objects: Specify a part

Select objects: Specify another part, or press ENTER to continue
[Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/
Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle
shows option dialog):
Specify a handle, or select a point on screen to access options

AMMAKEBASE | 211
 Using Rotate/Move Handles
Selecting a handle at the end of any axis of the 3D Manipulator icon allows
you to rotate and move parts. To rotate a part, move your pointer about the
axis of rotation. To move a part, move your pointer along the axis of the
selected handle.

Rotating Parts
ROTATE/MOVE handle selected; move cursor to define rotation/move axis:
Specify a handle
ROTATE mode, rotating around Y-axis (RETURN for options):
Specify a point on screen to rotate the part, or press ENTER
[Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/
Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle
shows option dialog):
Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER
Exit
Ends the command.

Undo
Undoes the last operation.
Mode
Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode.
Follow The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D
Manipulator icon.
Free The 3D Manipulator icon rotates, but the part remains
stationary. This option provides more control over the
rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Rotate Dialog Box

Entities are Moved

Specifies whether parts are moved.

212 | Chapter 1 Commands

Angle
Specifies the angle of rotation or the angle between copies.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to create.

Moving Parts
ROTATE/MOVE handle selected; move cursor to define rotation/move axis:
MOVE mode, moving along Y-axis (RETURN for options):
Specify a point along the axis of the selected handle, or press ENTER
[Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/
Undo/Mode[FOLLOW]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle
shows option dialog):
Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER
Exit
Ends the command.

Undo
Undoes the last operation.
Mode
Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode.
Follow The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D
Manipulator icon.
Free The 3D Manipulator icon moves, but the part remains
stationary. This option provides more control over the
rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Move Dialog Box

Entities are Moved

Specifies whether parts are moved.
Spacing
Specifies the distance to move the part or the spacing between copies.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to create.

AMMANIPULATOR | 213
 Using Free Move Handles
Selecting the handle at the center of the 3D Manipulator icon allows you to
respecify the location of the icon. In Follow mode, parts move relative to the
new location of the 3D Manipulator. In Free mode, only the 3D Manipulator
moves.
FREE MOVE handle selected; move cursor in arbitrary direction:
Specify a point on screen to move the 3D Manipulator
[Middle handle is FREE MOVE, other handles are ROTATE and MOVE]<Exit>/
Undo/Mode[FREE]/Select handle to manipulate. (Selecting no handle shows
option dialog): Choose an option, specify another handle, or press ENTER
Exit
Ends the command.

Undo
Undoes the last operation.
Mode
Toggles between Follow mode and Free mode.
Follow The part follows the rotation or movement of the 3D
Manipulator icon.
Free The 3D Manipulator icon moves, but the part remains
stationary. This option provides more control over the
rotation or movement of the part than Follow mode.

Common Options Dialog Box

214 | Chapter 1 Commands

Entities are Moved
Specifies whether selected parts are moved.

Align Manipulator with

Determines where the 3D Manipulator icon is located.
Entity
Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon with a selected part.
Select object: Specify a part

Face
Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon with a selected face.
Select face: Specify a face
Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
Enter n to cycle through the available faces, or press ENTER

UCS
Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon and the part with the current UCS.
WCS
Aligns the 3D Manipulator icon and the part with the WCS.
Only Align Axis
Aligns the axis of the 3D Manipulator with the UCS, WCS, selected part, or
face.
Only Move Origin
Moves the origin of the 3D Manipulator to the UCS, WCS, selected part, or
face.
Both Align Axis and Move Origin
Aligns the axis and moves the origin of the 3D Manipulator to the UCS, WCS,
selected part, or face.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to create.

Center View on Manipulator

Redraws the screen so that the 3D Manipulator is in the center of the view.

Default Position
Returns the 3D Manipulator to its default position.

Settings
Opens the Configuration dialog box.

AMMANIPULATOR | 215
 Configuration Dialog Box

Use Angle Snap

Specifies whether angle snap is used when rotating parts.

Angle
Specifies the angular increment used by angle snap.

Display
Specifies display settings for the 3D Manipulator.
Manipulator Size Factor
Controls the size of the 3D Manipulator icon.
Handle and Text Size Factor
Controls the size of the handles and axes text on the 3D Manipulator icon.
Autodisplay
Controls how parts are displayed when manipulated. Options include None,
Redraw, Shade, and Render.

Colors
Specifies the colors used to display the 3D manipulator icon. You can control
the color of the axes, the handles, and the text.
Crosshair Color
Specifies whether the 3D Manipulator uses the default crosshair color. When
this option is cleared, you can set the colors to be used for the 3D Manipulator.

216 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMMATE
Creates a mate constraint between two parts

Use AMMATE to create an assembly constraint between two parts defined by

selecting points, axes, planes, or non-planar faces.
AMMATE handles most constraint situations. The selection of the geometry
determines which mate constraint to use.
Objects that can be selected include the following:

■ Plane
■ Axis
■ Point
■ Non-planar face (sphere, cone, cylinder, or torus)

NOTE You can create a mate constraint using any combination of these
objects.

Plane
Defined by selecting a part’s planar face, an arc, a work plane, two axis entities,
a point and an axis, or three point entities.

two planes selected mate plane/plane constraint

Axis
Defined by selecting a line or a linear solid edge, an axis of an arc, a cylinder,
cone, or torus, a work axis, or two point entities.

axis and plane selected mate axis/plane constraint

AMMATE | 217
 Point
Defined by selecting an end of a line, an end of a solid edge, the center of an
arc, sphere, or torus, a work point, an AutoCAD point, or a near point of a
selected surface edge.

axis and point selected mate axis/point constraint

Non-planar Face
Defined by selecting a face of a cylinder, cone, or sphere. These faces have a
unique shape that can sometimes be used for establishing tangency.

non-planar faces selected tangent mate constraint

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 3D

Constraints ➤ Mate.
Toolbutton Mate
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ 3D Constraints ➤ Mate
Command AMMATE

Select first set of geometry: Select the first part

First set = Axis, (arc)
Enter an option [Clear/fAce/Point/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select second set of geometry: Select the second part
Second set = Axis, (arc)
Enter an option [Clear/fAce/Point/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER
Offset <0.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

218 | Chapter 1 Commands

Clear
Clears the current selection.

Face
If an axis is selected, use this option to cycle to the closest face. The prompt
changes so that you can respecify the axis or use the Next option to cycle to
the next available face.
First set = Plane
[Clear/aXis/Point/Next/Flip/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER

Point
Use this option to cycle to the nearest point.
First set = Point, (arc)
Select first set of geometry [Clear/aXis/fAce/cYcle]:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Cycle
Use this option to cycle to the next available object: a face, an axis, or a point.

Select First Set

Specifies another piece of geometry to define a plane between that piece and
the first selection.
[Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER

Clear
Clears the current selection.
Next
Highlights the next available object.
Flip
Flips the direction of the plane.
Cycle
Cycles to the next available object.

Select Second Set

Specifies another piece of geometry to define a plane between that piece and
the second selection.
[Clear/Next/Flip/cYcle]: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMMATE | 219
 Using the Animated Cursor
The animated cursor can be used to automate the selection process when you
are creating constraints.

Cycling
When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse button
to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to accept
your selection.

Flipping
When the cursor is displayed with directional arrows, use the left mouse
button to flip directions. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

NOTE By using the animated cursor, you can minimize your responses to the
command prompts.

AMMIGRATEBB
Converts data from previous Genius™ releases so that it can be used in Mechanical
Desktop 4

Use AMMIGRATEBB to convert data from Genius drawings so that it can be

used in Mechanical Desktop 4.
Command AMMIGRATEBB

AMMIRROR
Generates a mirrored copy of a part

Use AMMIRROR to mirror a part about a line or a specified face. You can define
the line by selecting existing points or by picking locations on screen.
You can physically mirror the part or create a new mirrored part without
removing the original definition.
If you are working in the Part Modeling environment, and you choose to
create a new part, Mechanical Desktop converts it to an unconsumed tool-
body definition.

220 | Chapter 1 Commands

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Mirror
Part.
Toolbutton Mirror Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Mirror Part
Command AMMIRROR

Select part to mirror: Select a part

Select planar face to mirror about or [Line]: Enter L or select a planar face

Select Planar Face

Select an existing planar face as the mirror plane.

plane selected part replaced new part created

Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:

Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
Enter an option [Create new part/Replace instances] <Create new part>:
Enter r or press ENTER

Line
Specify a line by selecting existing geometry or by picking points on screen.

line specified part replaced new part created

Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a start point

Specify second point: Specify an endpoint
Enter an option [Create new part/Replace instances] <Create new part>:
Enter r or press ENTER

AMMIRROR | 221
 Create New Part
Creates a new part that is the mirror image of the selected part.
Part Modeling Environment
Enter new part name <TOOLBODY1>: Specify a name or press ENTER

Assembly Modeling Environment

Enter new part name <PART2>: Specify a name or press ENTER

Replace Instances
Mirrors the existing part.

AMMODDIM
Modifies parametric dimensions on sketches and drawings

Use AMMODDIM to modify dimension values on the selected sketch or on the

drawing. This command works with parametric dimensions (created in Model
mode) but not reference dimensions (Drawing mode). Sketch dimensions are
automatically updated.
You can also use AMMODDIM to change parametric dimensions to numerical
values or equations. An equation can include any dimension parameter on
the part, to set up relationships between dimensions. Equations can also
include global parameters.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Edit Dimension.
Toolbutton Edit Dimension
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Edit Dimension
Command AMMODDIM

Select dimension to change: Select a dimension (1)

New value for dimension <2.5>: Specify a value
Select dimension to change: Select another dimension or press ENTER

222 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMMODE
Controls whether Model or Drawing mode is in effect

Use AMMODE to control Model and Drawing mode.

Selecting the Model or Scene tab in the Desktop Browser activates Model
mode. Selecting the Drawing tab activates Drawing mode.
Choosing the Part, Assembly, or Scene toolbutton on the Desktop Tools
toolbar activates Model mode. Choosing the Drawing Layout toolbutton
activates Drawing mode.
Browser Select the Model, Scene, or Drawing tab.
Toolbutton Select the appropriate toolbutton from the Desktop Tools
toolbar.
Command AMMODE

NOTE If you use the Browser, toolbutton, or menu method to switch modes,
AMMODE functions automatically unless you have disabled Synchronize
Browser/Toolbars with Modes in the Desktop Options dialog box.

Switching to Model Mode

If you are in Drawing mode, the following prompt is displayed:
Restore mode [Drawing/Model] <Model>: Press ENTER to switch to Model mode

Switching to Drawing Mode

If you are in Model mode, the following prompt is displayed:
Restore mode [Drawing/Model] <Drawing>:
Press ENTER to switch to Drawing mode

AMMODE | 223
AMMOVEDIM
Controls location of dimensions in Drawing mode

Use AMMOVEDIM in Drawing mode to move dimensions on the drawing

while maintaining their association to the drawing view geometry. You can
reattach dimensions to silhouette edges (the point at which a curved surface
turns away from the viewer) or to different vertices in a view.
Parametric dimensions are placed in the drawing view when it is created. Use
AMMOVEDIM to move parametric and reference dimensions within the view
or between views, to more clearly annotate your design.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Move Dimension.
Toolbutton Move Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Move Dimension
Command AMMOVEDIM

Enter option [Flip/Reattach/Move] <Move>: Choose an option

Move
Moves dimensions on a drawing view to a selected location. Maintains asso-
ciation with the drawing view geometry.
Select dimension: Select a dimension
Location for dimension: Specify a new location
Location for dimension: Specify a different location or press ENTER
Select dimension: Select another dimension or press ENTER

Flip
Flips dimension text. When a dimension is created, if the text is too large to
fit between the extension lines it is placed outside them, on one side or the
other. This option flips the text to the opposite side of its default placement.
Select dimension: Select a dimension
Select dimension: Select another dimension or press ENTER

224 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Reattach
Connects a dimension extension line to a point on a part after the part has
been moved. You can also use this option to move a dimension extension
line and reattach it to another point, to eliminate overlaps of dimensions on
the edges of the part.
Select extension line: Select an extension line
Select attachment point: Specify the point to be attached to the extension line
Select extension line: Select another extension line or press ENTER

AMMOVEVIEW
Moves a drawing view in Drawing mode

Use AMMOVEVIEW in Drawing mode to move a drawing view to another

location in the drawing or to another layout. Annotations move with the
drawing view.
The following restrictions apply:

■ An orthogonal view must remain aligned with its parent view.

■ An auxiliary view must remain aligned with the edge of the plane selected
from the parent view.
■ Moving a parent view also moves all dependent views.

Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose

Move.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Move View.
Toolbutton Move View
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Move View
Command AMMOVEVIEW

Select view to move: Specify a point in the view

View location: Specify a new location
View location: Specify another location or press ENTER

In the Browser method, the prompt to select a view is not displayed.

AMMOVEVIEW | 225
AMNEW
Converts a 3D solid into a part, and creates new part definitions, part instances,
subassemblies, and scenes

Use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid into a part or to create new part definitions,
part instances, subassemblies, or scenes in your drawing.

The Part Modeling Environment

In the Part Modeling environment, use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid to a
part, create a new part definition, or create another instance of an existing
toolbody. If a grounded base part already exists in the drawing, use AMNEW
to create toolbody definitions.

Converting a 3D Solid
Toolbutton New Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Convert Solid
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Press ENTER

Select an object or enter new part name <PART1>: Select a solid to convert

Creating a Part Definition

Browser In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose
New Part/Toolbody.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New
Part.
Toolbutton New Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Press ENTER

Select an object or enter new part name <TOOLBODY1>:
Specify a name or press ENTER

226 | Chapter 1 Commands

Creating an Instance of a Part
Browser Right-click a part icon and choose Copy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤
Instance.
Toolbutton Instance
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Instance
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Enter i

Select part to instance or [?] <PART1>: Specify a name or press ENTER
Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy
Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

Creating an Instance of a Toolbody

Browser Right-click a toolbody icon and choose Copy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Toolbody ➤
Instance.
Toolbutton Instance
Desktop Menu Toolbody ➤ Toolbody ➤ Instance
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part] <Part>: Enter i

Select part to instance or [?] <TOOLBODY1>: Specify a name or press ENTER
Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy
Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

The Assembly Modeling Environment

In the Assembly Modeling environment, use AMNEW to convert a 3D solid to
a part or to create a new part or subassembly definition, a copy of a part, or
a new scene.

Converting a 3D Solid
Toolbutton New Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Convert Solid
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] <Instance>: Enter p

Select an object or enter new part name <PART1>: Select a solid to convert

AMNEW | 227
 Creating a Part Definition
Browser In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose
New Part.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ New
Part.
Toolbutton New Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ New Part
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] <Instance>: Enter p

Select an object or enter new part name <PART1>:
Specify a name or press ENTER

Creating a New Part Instance

Browser Right-click a part icon and choose Copy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤
Instance.
Toolbutton Instance
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Instance
Command AMNEW

Enter an option [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] <Instance>: Press ENTER

Select part to instance or [?] <PART2>: Specify a part or press ENTER
Select insertion point: Specify a location for the copy
Select insertion point: Specify a location for another copy, or press ENTER

Creating a New Scene

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click the background and choose
New Scene.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Scene.
Toolbutton New Scene
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ New Scene
Command AMNEW

Create a new [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] <Instance>: Enter s

Enter scene name to activate or [?] <SCENE1>: Specify a name or press ENTER

228 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Creating a New Subassembly
Browser In the Model tab, right-click the background and choose
New ➤ New Assembly.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤
New Subassembly.
Toolbutton New Subassembly
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ New Subassembly
Command AMNEW

Create a new [Instance/Part/Scene/subAssembly] <Instance>: Enter a

Enter new subassembly name <SUB1>: Specify a name or press ENTER

AMNOTE
Attaches an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in Drawing mode

Use AMNOTE to attach an associative note to holes, undercuts, and parts in

Drawing mode.
Command AMNOTE

Select object to attach: Specify a part

Select objects: Specify another part or press ENTER

Note Symbol Dialog Box

Orientation
Defines whether the note is oriented to the left or to the right.

AMNOTE | 229
 Landing
Controls whether the leader line is extended to underline the note.

Attach
Attaches new information to an existing note.
Select object to attach: Specify an existing note

Edit MText
Opens the MText Editor where you can modify the properties of the text.

Leader Style
Pressing this button allows you to choose a style for the note leader.

Symbol Standards
Pressing this button opens the Standard Properties dialog box for the inter-
national drafting standard you are currently using.

AMOFFSET3D
Creates copies of 3D polylines that are set off from the original

Use AMOFFSET3D to create a new 3D polyline, located a specified distance

from an existing 3D polyline, or through a specified point. The new 3D
polyline is offset normal to the original, relative to the current view.
The position of the offset is not related to the current UCS. The offset is
3-dimensional, because the depth values of each point in the 3D polyline are
maintained.
Toolbutton Offset Wire
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Offset Wire
Command AMOFFSET3D

230 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Specify offset distance or [Through] <Through>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
Select 3D polyline to offset or <exit>: Select a 3D polyline
Specify point on side to offset: Specify a point for the side to offset
Select 3D polyline to offset or <exit>: Select another 3D polyline or press ENTER

Offset Distance
Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

Through
Creates an offset from a 3D polyline that passes through a specified point.

AMOFFSETSF
Creates a surface offset from a selected surface

Use AMOFFSETSF to create a copy of a surface an equal distance at every point

from the original surface.
Entering a positive distance creates the new surface in the same direction as
the surface normal of the original surface. Entering a negative distance
creates the new surface in the opposite direction from the surface normal of
the original surface.
Self-intersecting surfaces can be created if you

■ Enter negative offset distances from a primitive surface

■ Enter offset distances greater than the curvature of the original surface

Toolbutton Offset Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Offset
Command AMOFFSETSF

Select surfaces to offset: Select a surface

Select surfaces to offset: Select another surface or press ENTER
Enter offset distance <1.0000>: Specify a value

AMOFFSETSF | 231
AMOPTIONS
Manages part, assembly, surface, scene, drawing, and desktop preferences from a single
dialog box

Use AMOPTIONS to set preferences for your parts, assemblies, scenes, drawing
views, and desktop.
Browser In the Model, Scene or Drawing tab, click the Options
button.
Toolbutton Options
Desktop Menu Assist ➤ Desktop Options
Command AMOPTIONS

Desktop Options Dialog Box

The Desktop Options dialog box controls settings for parts, assemblies,
surfaces, scenes, drawings, annotations, and your desktop.

Desktop Tab

232 | Chapter 1 Commands

Browser
Specifies the settings for the Desktop Browser.
Synchronize Browser with Modes
Switches Browser tabs when modes are changed.
Synchronize Toolbars with Modes
Switches toolbars when Browser tabs are selected.
Browser Font
Controls the style and size of the font used by the Browser. Opens the Font
dialog box. See “AMBROWSERFONT” on page 79.

File Safety Precautions

Controls the auditing and saving of drawing files.
Desktop Audit Control
Controls when drawing audits are performed on Mechanical Desktop drawing
files.
Always Performs an audit and correction on any Mechanical
Desktop drawing file that is opened, attached, or
inserted.
On Attach Performs an audit and correction on any Mechanical
and Insert Desktop drawing file that is attached or inserted into the
current drawing file.
Never Disables auditing of Mechanical Desktop drawing files.

AutoSAVE Edited External Files

Specifies that when an AutoSAVE is performed on the current drawing, exter-
nally referenced files are also saved.

Dialog Controls
Opens the Dialog Controls dialog box, where you control settings for recent
values and spinner controls.

Drawing Units
Opens the Drawing Units dialog box, where you control the type of units and
angular measure for the drawing.

Show Messages
Opens the Show Messages dialog box, where you control whether Message
dialog boxes appear when you edit external files or open files with bills of
materials and balloons from earlier releases.

AMOPTIONS | 233
 Object Selection
Controls the display of dynamic highlighting and feature tips.

Desktop Symbol Size

Specifies the size of the constraint, DOF, and axis symbols.

Edit Fade Intensity

Specifies the size of the DOF, axis, and COG symbols.

AutoUCS View Alignment

Controls whether each viewport has a unique UCS.

Part Tab

Sketch Setting
Specifies the way sketches are handled when they are analyzed and
constrained.

234 | Chapter 1 Commands

Apply Constraint Rules
Applies constraint sizes, such as pickbox size and angular tolerance, to a
sketch.
Assume Rough Sketch
Applies horizontal and vertical constraints to a sketch.
Angular Tolerance
Sets the tolerance of a line assumed to be horizontal or vertical. If the angle
is greater than this setting, the line is not forced horizontally or vertically.
Apply to Linetype
Selects the linetype to apply constraints to. Any object drawn with a different
linetype is ignored, when the sketch is constrained.

NOTE Linetype names must be capitalized, or you receive an error message.

Tolerance/Pickbox Size
Opens the Pickbox Size dialog box. The pickbox size is used to determine
whether unjoined objects are joined when constraints are added.
Constraint Size
Opens the Constraint Display Size dialog box, which controls the display size of
2D constraints that are added to a sketch when it is solved. Use AMSHOWCON,
AMADDCON, or AMDELCON to view the constraints.

Naming Prefixes
Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new part or toolbody when
it is created. Double-click the appropriate field to specify a name.

Suppressed Dimensions and DOFs

Specifies the color applied to suppressed dimensions and degrees of freedom
symbols.
Color
Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide
for more information about changing colors.

Saved File Format

Reduces the file size when the drawing is saved.

AMOPTIONS | 235
 Assembly Tab

Automatic
Updates assembly views, assemblies, or scenes after changes have been made.
View Restore with Assembly Activation
Restores the view associated with an assembly when the assembly is activated.
Update Assembly as Constrained
Updates an assembly when constraints are added or changed.
Update External Assembly Constraints
Updates assembly constraints in external files if the external files have been
modified.

Naming Prefix
Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new subassembly when it
is created. Double-click the field to specify a name.

Attach and Insert Parts

Specifies that parts are attached and inserted according to their center of
geometry or absolute insertion point.

236 | Chapter 1 Commands

Scene Tab

Existing Scenes
Locks all part positions when a suppressed feature is encountered in an existing
scene.

Naming Prefix
Specifies the prefix that is added to the name of a new scene when it is created.
Double-click the field to specify a name.

Automatic
Automatically updates a scene when modifications are made.

AMOPTIONS | 237
 Surfaces Tab

Tolerances
Sets tolerances to apply when a surface is created.
System Tolerance
Specifies the perpendicular distance between surface-derived polylines and
an ideal NURBS spline or surface.
Polyline Fit Tolerance
Specifies a value for making an optimal fit of a spline or surface to a polyline.
Join Gap Tolerance
Specifies the maximum distance to join wires.
Blend Tolerance
Specifies the approximate width of blends when you are joining surfaces or
splines to avoid C0 breaks.

Surface/Spline Options
Sets polyline fit tolerances.
Polyline Fit
Opens the Polyline Fit dialog box.

238 | Chapter 1 Commands

Polyline Fit Length
Specifies a value for finding flat polyline segments. New splines and surfaces
created from polylines lie flat against any polyline segment of a length that
is greater than this value.
Polyline Fit Angle
Specifies a value for finding sharp corners in polylines. New splines and
surfaces are split into separate objects at any angle that is less than this value.

Model Size
Opens the Approximate Model Size dialog box.

Surface Properties
Sets the properties of surface display lines.
U & V Display Mode
Applies linetypes AMULTYPE and AMVLTYPE to U and V surface display lines.
U Display Wires
Specifies the number of display lines on a surface in the U direction.
V Display Wires
Specifies the number of display lines on a surface in the V direction.
Normal Length
Specifies the length of the surface normal.

Augmented Line Properties

Control the properties of augmented lines.
Vector Length
Specifies the length of vectors on augmentation lines.

Page Length
Sets the number of text lines to be sent to the text window before the screen
pauses.

Group Prefix
Sets the default prefix for surfaces.

Keep Original
Retains original settings.

AMOPTIONS | 239
 Drawings Tab

Suppress
Suppresses calculations to speed up working in Drawing mode.
Hidden Line Calculations
Specifies suppression of hidden lines calculations in all views when you enter
Drawing mode.
View Updates
Specifies suppression of updating associated geometry in all views when you
enter Drawing mode.
Drawing View Borders
Hides drawing view borders.

240 | Chapter 1 Commands

Hatch Pattern
Controls the settings for hatch patterns created in drawing views.
Default Hatch Pattern
Opens the Hatch Patterns dialog box.
One Layer for Hatch Patterns
Specifies that all hatch patterns are placed on the same layer.
Display Hatch in Iso Views
Specifies that the hatch is displayed in isometric views.
Hide Obscured Hatch
Specifies that the obscured hatch is hidden.

Use Part Color for

Sets the color of the part to be used for geometry in the drawing views.
Visible Edges
Specifies that the visible edges in drawing views match the color of the part.
Hidden Edges
Specifies that the hidden edges in drawing views match the color of the part.
Hatch
Specifies that the hatch patterns in drawing views match the color of the part.

Projection Type
Sets the type of projection to use when you are creating drawing views.
Third Angle
Arranges drawing views to correspond with third-angle projection.
First Angle
Arranges drawing views to correspond with first-angle projection.

Layer/Object Settings
Opens the Layer/Object Settings dialog box.

AMOPTIONS | 241
 Annotation Tab

Parametric Dimension Display

Controls the display of parametric dimensions in Drawing mode.
Active Part
Specifies the display of parametric dimensions for the active part in drawing
views.
Scenes, Groups, Selected Objects
Specifies the display of parametric dimensions for scenes, groups, and
selected objects.
Section Views
Specifies the display of parametric dimensions in section views.
Hide Zero Length Parametric Dimensions
Specifies the display of zero-length parametric dimensions in drawing views.
Automatically Arrange in Views
Specifies that parametric dimensions are automatically arranged when a
drawing view is created.
On External Parts as Reference Dims
Specifies that parametric dimensions of external parts are displayed as refer-
ence dimensions in drawing views.

242 | Chapter 1 Commands

Drafting Standards
Opens the Drafting Standards dialog box, where you apply drafting standards
to tapped holes and to section and detail views.

Centerline Settings
Opens the Centerlines dialog box, where you control how centerlines and
centermarks appear in drawing views.

Display Tapped Holes

Specifies how tapped holes are displayed in drawing views.

Save Orphaned Annotations in Group

Saves orphaned annotations in a group named AM_ORPHAN, instead of
removing them.

Dialog Controls Dialog Box

Preset Values
Controls the preset values defined in dialog boxes.
Distance
Controls the default value for distances.
Angle
Controls the default value for angles.
Draft Angle
Controls the default value for draft angles.

AMOPTIONS | 243
 New
Opens the New Preset Value dialog box, where you can define a new preset
value.

Delete
Deletes a selected preset value.
Move Up
Moves a selected preset value upward in the list.
Move Down
Moves a selected preset value downward in the list.
Sort
Sorts the preset values alphabetically.

Recent Values
Controls the recent preset values.

Spinner Control Increments

Sets values for spinner controls.
Angle
Specifies the angular increments used by spinner controls.
Distance
Specifies the linear increments used by spinner controls.

Apply & Close

Applies settings and closes the dialog box.

244 | Chapter 1 Commands

Drawing Units Dialog Box

Length
Controls the type and precision of linear units.

Angle
Controls the type, precision, and direction of angular units.

Drawing Units for DesignCenter Blocks

Controls the scale used for DesignCenter blocks that are inserted into the
drawing.

Sample Output
Displays the way your units appear in the drawing.

Direction
Opens the Direction Control dialog box, where you define the direction of
the base angle.

OK
Closes the Drawing Units dialog box.

AMOPTIONS | 245
 Direction Control Dialog Box
Controls the direction of the base angle used when drawing objects. The
default is East which corresponds to 0 degrees. You may change it to any
quadrant, or specify an angle by selecting two points on screen.

Show Messages Dialog Box

External File Editing

Controls the display of Show Messages dialog boxes while you are editing
externally referenced files.

File Saving/Maintenance
Controls the display of Show Messages dialog boxes while you are opening
and saving files.

246 | Chapter 1 Commands

Tolerance/Pickbox Size Dialog Box

When considering unjoined objects in a sketch, use the slider to control the
size of the pickbox used by Mechanical Desktop. If the endpoints of the
objects do not lie inside the pickbox, the objects will not be joined.

Constraint Display Size Dialog Box

Use the slider to control the size at which 2D constraints are displayed.

Polyline Fit Dialog Box

Length Prompt
Measures the length of a given segment in a polyline. Use this option to
determine which part of the polyline is the shortest.

AMOPTIONS | 247
 If Length is Longer than
Sets the AMPFITLEN system variable. The current value of AMPFITLEN is based
on the portion of the polyline you specified for the Length prompt.

Fit Tolerance
Displays and specifies a tolerance for fitting a spline through the input
polyline with the least squares approximation method.

Angle Prompt
Measures the angle between two segments in the polyline. Select an angle
that defines the smallest variation in direction allowed before a sharp corner
is created.

If Angle is Less than

Sets the AMPFITANG system variable, which holds sharp corners of the
polyline in the resultant spline, if the angle of the corner is less than the
value you specify.

Approximate Model Size Dialog Box

Model Size
Specifies the model size.

Units
Specifies the units of measure.

Measure Model
Measures the model automatically, using the current drawing units.

248 | Chapter 1 Commands

Hatch Patterns Dialog Box

Pattern Type
Specifies the type of hatch to use for section views. Cycle through the avail-
able patterns, by clicking the image tile, or select a type from the drop-down
list. Valid types include Predefined, User-defined, and Custom.

Hatch Style
Specifies the way hatch is applied. Cycle through the available styles, by
clicking the image tile, or select a style from the drop-down list.

Pattern Properties
Specifies the properties of the selected hatch pattern.
ISO Pen Width
Specifies the ISO pen width to apply to the hatch pattern.

AMOPTIONS | 249
 Pattern
Specifies the hatch pattern to use.
Custom Pattern
Specifies the custom hatch pattern to use.
Scale
Specifies the hatch pattern scale factor.
Angle
Specifies the angle to apply to the hatch pattern.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing to apply to user-defined hatch patterns.
Double
Specifies whether to double user-defined hatch patterns.
Exploded
Specifies whether to explode the hatch pattern.

Layer/Object Settings Dialog Box

Controls the properties of prototype drawing layers and objects.

Use Automatic Property Management

Specifies whether the prototype properties are used when drawing objects are
created.

Based on Standard
Specifies the standard to use for prototype objects.

Filter
Specifies the filter to use when applying prototype properties.

Color/Lineweight Mapping
Opens the Color/Lineweight Mapping dialog box.

250 | Chapter 1 Commands

Layers Tab
Controls the settings for prototype layers in Drawing mode.

Objects Tab
Controls the settings for prototype objects in Drawing mode.

AMOPTIONS | 251
 Color/Lineweight Mapping Dialog Box
Controls the lineweight mapping of prototype colors for layers and objects
in Drawing mode.

New
Opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box.
Delete
Deletes a color/lineweight setting.
Apply
Applies the settings to colors and lineweights.

Drafting Standards Dialog Box

252 | Chapter 1 Commands

Tapped Holes
Specifies the drafting standard to apply to tapped holes.
Display Vanish
Controls whether a vanish is applied to ANSI tapped holes.
Thread Thickness
Controls the thread thickness of DIN or ISO tapped holes.

Detail Views
Specifies the drafting standard to apply to detail views.
Detail Symbol
Displays the default detail symbol, if any.
Detail Label
Displays the default detail label, if any.

Section Views
Specifies the drafting standard to apply to section views.
Section Symbol
Displays the default section symbol, if any.
Section Label
Displays the default section label, if any.

Centerlines Dialog Box

AMOPTIONS | 253
 Parametric Sizing of Extension Lines
Sizes the extension lines of centermarks parametrically.

Centermark
Specifies the size of the centermark.

Gap
Specifies the gap between the centermark and the extension lines.

Overshoot
Specifies the distance that centermark extension lines overshoot the circular
edge.

Automatic Centerlines
Specifies that centerlines are automatically placed when a view containing
holes, fillets, or circular edges is created.
Apply to Viewtypes
Specifies that automatic centerlines are created for selected views.

AMPARDIM
Creates parametric dimensions in Model mode

Use AMPARDIM in Model mode to create parametric dimensions to constrain

sketches and define features.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ New Dimension.
Toolbutton New Dimension
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ New Dimension
Command AMPARDIM

Select first object: Select the first object

Select second object or place dimension: Select a second object or specify a point
Enter dimension value or [Undo/Hor/Ver/Align/Par/aNgle/Ord/Diameter/pLace]
<3.0634>: Choose an option, or specify a value, and press ENTER
Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints.
Select first object: Select another object or press ENTER

254 | Chapter 1 Commands

Enter Dimension Value
Specifies the value of the dimension.

Undo
Undoes the current selection and returns to the first prompt.

Hor
Forces a horizontal dimension.

Ver
Forces a vertical dimension.

Align
Forces an aligned dimension.

Par
Forces a parallel dimension. You must select two objects for this option.

Angle
Forces an angular dimension.

Ord
Forces an ordinate dimension.

Diameter
Forces a diameter dimension.

Place
Respecifies the location for the dimension.
Placement point: Specify a location
Placement point: Specify another location or press ENTER

AMPARDIM | 255
AMPARTEDGE
Creates a line or an arc on a selected edge to use in a new profile

Use AMPARTEDGE to create a line or an arc on a selected edge that can be used
in a new sketch.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Copy Edge.
Toolbutton Copy Edge
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Copy Edge
Command AMPARTEDGE

Enter an option [Face/select Edge] <select Edge>:

Enter f to select a face, specify a part edge, or press ENTER

Select Edge
Creates a line or an arc on selected edges.
Select edge to copy: Select an edge
Select edge to copy: Select another edge or press ENTER

edge copied

Face
Creates lines and arcs on all edges of a selected face.
Select face edge: Select the edge of a face
Next/<Accept>: Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

face copied

256 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMPARTLINE
Creates a 3D polyline on the profile of the surface in the current view

Use AMPARTLINE to create a 3D polyline that represents a parting line on an

existing surface. The parting line shows where to cut the surface. AMPARTLINE
does not produce surface edges as output. The individual 3D polyline, created
by AMPARTLINE for each surface, lies on all the surfaces intersected by the
parting line.
Parting lines are used in the mold and tool design industry to create a plane
of separation of two halves that make a mold.
Toolbutton Parting Line
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Parting Line
Command AMPARTLINE

Select surfaces to define parting lines: Select a surface

Select surfaces to define parting lines: Select another surface or press ENTER
Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]:
Choose an option, or specify a start point (1)

NOTE Use the direction prompt to choose a view direction for generating the
parting line. The most commonly used option is View Direction.

Start Point
Specifies a starting point for generating a parting line. The parting line is
created perpendicular to the view direction at the edge where the surface
curves away and is obscured from the view.
Specify end point: Specify an endpoint (2)

view direction defined parting line created

AMPARTLINE | 257
 Viewdir
Specifies the current view for creation of the parting line.

view defined parting line created

Wire
Specifies a wire to define the view direction. The wire is projected onto the
surface to determine the parting line.
Select wire to define direction: Specify a wire

wire selected parting line created

X/Y/Z
Specifies the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS, to define the view direction.

AMPARTLIST
Creates and places a parts list in a drawing

Use AMPARTLIST to place a list of parts in a drawing. The parts list uses the
number of columns specified in the Symbol Standards settings, as well as the
information assigned to the part references created by the bill of materials
(BOM) database. Changes to any setting, or to any information in the data-
base, are automatically reflected in the parts list.

258 | Chapter 1 Commands

Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon and choose
Parts List ➤ Parts List.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤
Parts List.
Toolbutton Place Parts List
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Parts List
Command AMPARTLIST

Part list name <Parts List>: Specify a name or press ENTER

Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] <All>:
Choose an option or press ENTER to continue
Specify location or ENTER to Left direction: Specify a location or press ENTER

All
Selects all part references in the drawing.

all parts included

Parts
Select part references for the parts to include.
Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] <All>: Enter p
Select objects: Select a part reference
Select objects: Select a part reference or press ENTER

part references selected parts list created

AMPARTLIST | 259
 Range
Specify the range of rows in the BOM database to include.
Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] <All>: Enter r
Starting Row <1>: Enter the start row
Ending Row <4>: Enter the end row

range specified

Sheet
Creates an empty parts list sheet in the drawing. Use this sheet to add non-
parametric information to your drawing.

View
Specify the drawing view for the parts list. Only parts in the selected view are
included in the parts list.
Select type of Parts List: [All/Parts/Range/Sheet/View] <All>: Enter v
Select drawing view: Specify the drawing view

view specified

260 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMPARTPROP
Lists the mass properties of the active part

Use AMPARTPROP to list the mass properties of the active part.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Mass
Properties.
Toolbutton Mass Properties
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Mass Properties
Command AMPARTPROP

Part Mass Properties Dialog Box

Density
Specifies the density of the material of the part. Enter a value in this field and
press APPLY for the mass properties to be recalculated. Units are based on the
current drawing units. For example, if you are working in inches, the volume
is represented in cubic inches and the surface area in square inches.

File
Opens the Save As dialog box.

AMPARTPROP | 261
 Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder for the new file.

File Name
Specifies the file name of the new file.

Save as Type
Specifies the file extension type for the new file.

Open as Read-Only
Specifies the file as a read-only file.

AMPARTREF
Creates a reference to a part

Use AMPARTREF to add attribute values to

■ Non-parametric geometry
■ A point in the drawing

A part reference block is created. You add information to the part reference
so that it appears in the bill of material (BOM) database and can be used to
create balloons and parts lists.
To assign a part reference to non-parametric geometry, use BLOCK to create a
block reference containing the geometry, and then insert the block into your
drawing. Use AMPARTREF to assign attributes to the block.

262 | Chapter 1 Commands

To assign a part reference to a location in your drawing, select a point, and
assign attributes to the part reference that is created.
Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon, and choose
Parts List ➤ Place Part Reference.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤
Place Part Reference.
Toolbutton Place Part Reference
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Place Part Reference
Command AMPARTREF

Select point [Block/Copy/Reference]:

Choose an option, or specify a point to place the part reference

Block
Select a block reference, and enter values in the Part Ref Attributes dialog box.

Copy
Select a part reference to copy attributes from, and enter values in the Part
Ref Attributes dialog box. A new part reference is created.

Select Point
Specify a point in the drawing, and enter values in the Part Ref Attributes
dialog box.

Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box

Part No.
Double-click the white field to enter a part number.

AMPARTREF | 263
 Material
Double-click the white field to enter material information.

Vendor
Double-click the white field to enter vendor information.

Mass
Double-click the white field to enter the mass.

Note
Double-click the white field to enter a note.

Reference Quantity
Double-click the white field to enter the number of items to reference.

Sources
Opens the Select Source of Data dialog box. This option is available only
when you are editing a part reference. See “AMPARTREFEDIT.”

AMPARTREFEDIT
Edits data associated with a part reference

Use AMPARTREFEDIT to edit attribute information for individual part refer-

ences in your drawing. Changes made to the part reference information are
automatically updated in the BOM database; they are reflected in balloons
and parts lists in your drawing.
Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a layout icon, and choose
Parts List ➤ Part Reference Edit.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Parts List ➤
Part Reference Edit.
Toolbutton Part Reference Edit
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Parts List ➤ Part Reference Edit
Command AMPARTREFEDIT

Select pick object: Select a part reference

Next/<Accept>: Enter n to cycle to the next part reference, or press ENTER

264 | Chapter 1 Commands

Part Ref Attributes Dialog Box

Part No.
Double-click the white field to edit the part number.

Material
Double-click the white field to edit the material information.

Vendor
Double-click the white field to edit the vendor information.

Mass
Double-click the white field to edit the mass.

Note
Double-click the white field to edit the note.

Reference Quantity
Double-click the white field to edit the number of items to reference.

Sources
Opens the Select Source of Data dialog box.

AMPARTREFEDIT | 265
 Select Source of Data Dialog Box

The Select Source of Data dialog box displays information about the part
references contained in the current BOM database. Click the plus sign in
front of any entry to view the information for that entry.

Merge
Merges the selected information into the current part reference. Use this
option to merge data from one BOM database to another.

AMPARTSPLIT
Splits the active part into two parts about a work plane or planar face

Use AMPARTSPLIT in the Part/Assembly environment to split a part into two

individual parts.
Use a work plane, a planar face, or a split line to define the location for the
split. Specify which side of the split becomes the new part, and give it a
name.

work plane selected part split at plane

Draft can be applied to the faces of both parts, but the part split feature
cannot be modified after it is created.

266 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed
Features ➤ Part Split.
Toolbutton Part Split
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Part Split
Command AMPARTSPLIT

Select planar face, work plane, or split line for split:

Select a planar face, a work plane, or a split line
Define side for new part: [Accept/Flip] <Accept>:
Enter f to flip the direction arrow toward the new part, or press ENTER
Enter name of the new part <PART2>: Enter a new part name or press ENTER

AMPATTERNDEF
Sets hatching pattern attributes for part definitions

Use AMPATTERNDEF in Model mode to assign a hatch pattern to a part

definition, to be used when it is sectioned in a drawing. Hatch patterns help
identify parts in an assembly drawing.
Toolbutton Hatch Pattern
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Hatch Patterns
Command AMPATTERNDEF

Hatch Pattern Dialog Box

AMPATTERNDEF | 267
 Parts/Subassemblies
Lists the part and subassembly definitions in the current drawing.

Pattern Type
Specifies predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch patterns. Click the image
tile to cycle through the available predefined patterns.

Pattern Properties
Specifies the properties to assign to the selected hatch pattern.
ISO Pen Width
Specifies ISO-related pattern scaling, based on the selected pen width.
Pattern
Lists the available predefined hatch patterns.
Custom Pattern
Specifies a custom hatch pattern name.
Scale
Sets the size of the hatch pattern.
Angle
Sets the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
Spacing
Sets the spacing of a user-defined hatch pattern.
Double
Creates a double hatch pattern image, if a user-defined hatch pattern is
specified.
Exploded
Creates an exploded hatch pattern image.

NOTE See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information about creating
hatch patterns.

268 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMPLANE
Creates one or more planar surfaces

Use AMPLANE to create a planar surface from either two points in space or a
closed object. You can create the planar surface on the current UCS or on
another plane without changing the current viewport to that plane.
Complex models often have many flat, irregular boundaries that can be
surfaced easily with AMPLANE.
Toolbutton Planar Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Planar
Command AMPLANE

Specify first corner or [Plane/Wires]:

Choose an option, or specify the first corner (1)

First Corner
Creates a planar surface relative to the current UCS when you specify two
points that are diagonal corners of a rectangle.
Specify second corner: Specify the second corner (2)

1 2

Plane
Defines a plane other than that of the current UCS and creates a planar face
using the First Corner option.
Specify first plane location or [Last/View/Wire/Xy/Yz/zAxis/Zx]:
Choose an option, or specify the first point

First Plane Location

Defines a plane by specifying three points, and creates a planar face using the
First Corner option.
Select second plane location: Specify a second point
Select third plane location: Specify a third point

Last
Uses the last defined plane for the planar face.

AMPLANE | 269
 View
Uses the current view as the plane.
Wire
Uses an existing wire to define the plane. Valid wires are circles, arcs, and
ellipses. The origin of the new plane is at the center point of the wire, and
the plane is oriented to the wire.
Select an arc, circle or ellipse: Select a wire

Xy
Uses the XY axes of the current UCS to define the plane.
Specify point on XY plane: Specify a point for the origin of the new plane

Yz
Uses the YZ axes of the current UCS to define the plane.
Specify point on YZ plane: Specify a point for the origin of the new plane

Z Axis
Defines a plane using an origin point and a point on the Z axis of the new
plane.
Specify point on plane: Specify an origin point
Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of the plane: Specify a point defining the Z axis

Zx
Uses the ZX axes of the current UCS to define the plane.
Specify point on ZX plane: Specify a point for the origin of the new plane

Wires
Creates one or more trimmed, planar surfaces from a selected wire or a set of
selected wires. Valid wire input includes arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, polylines,
and splines. Each selected wire must be planar and closed.
Select wires: Select a closed wire (1)
Select wires: Select another closed wire or press ENTER

If you select a single object, AMPLANE creates a trimmed planar surface.

270 | Chapter 1 Commands

 If you select multiple objects, AMPLANE creates one or more trimmed planar
surfaces, based on the boundaries of the selected objects.

AMPOWERDIM
Creates dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode

Use AMPOWERDIM to create dimensions in Model mode and Drawing mode.

Power dimensions are parametric and can have tolerances and fit symbols
applied to them.

Power Dimensioning in Model Mode

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Power Dimensioning.
Toolbutton Power Dimensioning
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Power Dimensioning
Command AMPOWERDIM

(SINGLE) First extension line origin or [Angular/Options/Baseline/Chain/Update]

<Select>: Choose an option or specify the origin of the first extension line

First Extension Line Origin

Determines the origin of the first extension line of the dimension.
Second extension line origin: Specify the origin of the second extension line
Place dimension line [Options/Pickobj] <Options>:
Choose an option or specify a location for the dimension

Angular
Creates an angular dimension.
(SINGLE) Select arc, circle, line, or RETURN
[Linear/Options/Baseline/Chain/Update]:
Choose an option, or specify an arc, a circle, or a line

AMPOWERDIM | 271
 Arc
Creates an angular dimension between the endpoints of an arc. After the
dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens.
Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location

Circle
Creates an angular dimension between the point used to select a circle and a
second point on the circle. After the dimension has been placed, the Power
Dimensioning dialog box opens.
Second angle endpoint: Specify the second point on the circle
Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location

Line
Creates an angular dimension between two lines. After the dimension has
been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens.
Second line: Specify the second line
Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location

Return
Creates an angular dimension specified by a vertex and two endpoints. After
the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box opens.
Angle vertex: Specify the vertex for the dimension
First angle endpoint: Specify the endpoint for the first extension line
Second angle endpoint: Specify the endpoint for the second extension line
Dimension arc line location (Angle): Specify a dimension location

Linear
Creates linear dimensions, using the First Extension Line Origin option.

Options
Opens the Power Dimensioning dialog box. You can specify the settings to
be applied to dimensions before they are created.

Baseline
Creates baseline dimensions using an existing dimension.
Second extension line origin <Select>: Specify a point

272 | Chapter 1 Commands

Chain
Creates a chain of dimensions, aligning them with an existing dimension.
After the dimension has been placed, the Power Dimensioning dialog box
opens.
Select: Specify an existing dimension
Second extension line origin <Select>:
Specify the origin of the second extension line
(CHAIN) Next extension line origin [Baseline/Single/New] <Exit>:
Choose an option, specify another extension line origin, or press ENTER

Baseline
Creates dimensions from a specified baseline, using the Baseline option.
Single
Creates a single dimension.
New
Creates a new chain of dimensions from an existing dimension.

Update
Updates a specified dimension.
Select DIMENSION. Specify a dimension

Power Dimensioning in Drawing Mode

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Power
Dimensioning.
Toolbutton Power Dimensioning
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Power Dimensioning
Command AMPOWERDIM

NOTE See “Power Dimensioning in Model Mode” on page 271 for a complete
description of options.

Power Dimensioning Dialog Box

The Power Dimensioning dialog box controls the settings for power dimen-
sions. It contains two tabs, Tolerances and Fits.

AMPOWERDIM | 273
 Dimension Text
Controls the text used by the dimension. You can add text to the default
dimension value, underline or put a box around the text, and specify
whether alternate units are used.

Expression
Specifies the expression to use for the dimension. You can use either an equa-
tion or a design variable to control the size of the dimension.

Decimals
Controls the precision of the dimension value.

Apply to
Applies settings to selected dimensions.

Copy from
Copies settings from a selected dimension. Opens the Parameters to Copy
dialog box.

Enable
Enables tolerance and fit settings.

Tolerances Tab

Upper Deviation
Controls the upper deviation value.

274 | Chapter 1 Commands

Lower Deviation
Controls the lower deviation value.
Type
Controls the type of deviation to use.

Fits Tab

Fit Symbol
Controls the fit symbol to use.
Type
Controls the type of fit to use.

Parameters to Copy Dialog Box

Copies selected parameters from a specified dimension and applies them to

the dimension being created.

AMPOWERDIM | 275
AMPOWEREDIT
Edits parametric dimensions, reference dimensions, and annotation objects

Use AMPOWEREDIT to edit parametric and reference dimensions, and anno-

tation objects, including

■ Welding symbols
■ Feature control frames
■ Datum identifiers
■ Datum targets
■ Parts lists
■ Balloons

Power Editing in Model Mode

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose
Dimensioning ➤ Power Edit.
Toolbutton Power Edit
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Dimensioning ➤ Power Edit
Command AMPOWEREDIT

Select object: Specify a dimension

After a dimension has been selected, the Power Dimensioning dialog box
opens. See AMPOWERDIM for a complete description of the options available.

Power Editing in Drawing Mode

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Power Edit.
Toolbutton Power Edit
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Power Edit
Command AMPOWERDIT

Select object: Specify a dimension

276 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMPRIMSF
Creates a cone, cylinder, torus, and sphere

Use AMPRIMSF to create primitive surface models. AMPRIMSF creates a cone,

cylinder, sphere, or torus that can be used to create more complex surfaces.
The direction of revolution is determined by the AutoCAD system variable
ANGDIR. If ANGDIR = 0, the direction of revolution is counterclockwise. If
ANGDIR = 1, the direction of revolution is clockwise. The ANGDIR setting
affects the prompt string, (+=ccw, -=cw).

Creating a Cone
Creates a cone or a partial cone, depending on option settings, using the Z
axis of the current UCS as the conic axis. Mechanical Desktop cones can have
a top with a specified radius.
Toolbutton Cone
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Cone
Command AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Enter c to create a cone

Specify base center point: Specify a center point
Enter base radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter top radius or [Diameter] <0.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter height <1.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

AMPRIMSF | 277
 Creating a Cylinder
Creates a cylindrical or a partially cylindrical surface, depending on option
settings.
Toolbutton Cylinder
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Cylinder
Command AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>:

Enter y to create a cylinder
Specify base center point: Specify a point
Enter base radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter height <1.0000>: Specify a value
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

Creating a Sphere
Creates a spherical or a partially spherical surface, depending on option
settings.
Toolbutton Sphere
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Sphere
Command AMPRIMSF

278 | Chapter 1 Commands

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>: Press ENTER
Specify center of sphere: Specify a point
Enter radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

Creating a Torus
Creates a toroidal or partially toroidal surface parallel to the XY plane of the
current UCS. This type of surface is similar to a tube connected end to end to
form a circle.
Toolbutton Torus
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Primitives ➤ Torus
Command AMPRIMSF

Enter an option [Cone/cYlinder/Sphere/Torus] <Sphere>:

Enter t to create a torus
Specify base center point: Specify a point
Enter radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter tube radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

The first prompt is not available in toolbutton and menu methods.

AMPRIMSF | 279
 Using Grips with Primitive Surfaces
Each surface primitive can be edited (stretched, moved, rotated, scaled, or
mirrored) using grips. Assuming Grip mode is turned on, select the primitive
to display the grips. In general, use grips on primitive surfaces the same way
you use them on AutoCAD objects. See the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more
information about editing with grips.

NOTE If more than the specified number of grips are displayed on a surface,
it has lost its primitive definition. AMREFINESF or AMEDITSF destroys the
definition of a primitive.

Cone
On a cone with no top radius, three grips are displayed: top center, base
center, and base radius.
On a cone with a radius on its top, four grips are displayed: top center, top
radius, base center, and base radius.
Use the base center grip to stretch or shrink the height of the cone and turn
it upside down. To stretch the height of the cone, work in an appropriate
view such as the front view.
Use the base radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the base. To stretch
or shrink the base radius of the cone, work in an appropriate viewport such
as the isometric viewport.
The top center and top radius grips work like the base center and base radius
grips. Use the top center grip to stretch or shrink the height of the cone and
turn it upside down. Use the top radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of
the top.
If you shrink the radius of the top to 0, the top radius grip merges with the top
center grip, leaving only the top center grip. You cannot use the remaining
top center grip to reverse the operation.

280 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Cylinder
Three grips are displayed on a cylinder: base center, base radius, and top.
Use the top and base center grips to stretch or shrink the height of the cylinder
and turn it upside down. The front view is appropriate for using the top and
base grips.
Use the base radius grip to stretch or shrink the radius of the cylinder. The top
view is good for using the base radius grip. When stretching the base radius
grip, if the point you specify lies on the base center grip, an error message is
displayed. You cannot change a cylinder to a cone.

Sphere
Two grips are displayed on a sphere: center and radius. Use the center grip to
move the sphere. Use the radius grip to stretch or shrink the sphere.

Torus
Three grips are displayed on a torus: center, torus tube radius, and torus radius.
Use the center grip to move the torus. Use the torus tube radius grip to stretch
or shrink the radius of the tube. Use the torus radius grip to stretch or shrink
the overall radius of the torus. If you stretch the radius so much that the torus
intersects itself, an error message is displayed.

AMPROFILE
Solves 2D geometry to create a constrained sketch

Use AMPROFILE to solve a closed sketch. AMPROFILE creates a constrained

sketch that can be used as a profile for extrude, revolve, loft, or sweep features.
A profile can include 2D geometry such as model edges, sketch planes, work
axes, and dimensions. To create a profile, you can combine newly sketched
geometry and existing part edges or use only model edges.
Profiles can also consist of multiple loops. The following guidelines apply:

■ Nested loops must be enclosed by a closed loop that serves as a boundary

for the profiled sketch.
■ A nested loop cannot serve as a boundary for another nested loop.
■ Sketched loops cannot overlap, intersect, or touch.
■ Disjointed loops may be used provided they do not overlap, intersect, or
touch.
■ Model edges and sketched entities cannot be combined to form a loop.

AMPROFILE | 281
 Solving a Profile Containing One Object
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Single Profile.
Toolbutton Single Profile
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Single Profile
Command AMPROFILE

Use this option to have a profile automatically created from a closed object.

ellipse circle closed polyline

Solving a Profile Containing Multiple Objects

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Profile.
Toolbutton Profile
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile
Command AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects

Select objects for sketch: Select more objects, or press ENTER

lines and arcs

282 | Chapter 1 Commands

Solving a Profile Containing Nested Loops
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Profile.
Toolbutton Profile
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile
Command AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects

Select objects for sketch: Select more objects, or press ENTER

nested loops

Solving a Profile Containing Disjointed Loops

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Profile.
Toolbutton Profile
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Profile
Command AMPROFILE

Select objects for sketch: Select objects

Select objects for sketch: Select more objects, or press ENTER

disjointed loops

AMPROFILE | 283
AMPROJECT
Projects a wire onto a surface

Use AMPROJECT to project wires either in a given direction or normal to a

surface. AMPROJECT projects a 2D line that represents an opening onto a 3D
surface, to create a hole in the surface (a trimmed surface). It can also project
a 3D polyline that represents the extents of the opening onto a surface.
Valid input for wires includes arcs, augmented lines, circles, ellipses, lines,
points, polylines, and splines.
Output from AMPROJECT can include the 3D opening line, if required. An
error message is displayed if the selected wire and surface don’t intersect or if
the nearest points on the surface are not within the system tolerance.
For Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM) surface verification, AMPROJECT
can be used to project an augmented line consisting of a single point.

NOTE To trim a surface, select the portion of the surface you want to keep.

Toolbutton Projection Wire

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Project Wire
Command AMPROJECT

Select wires to project: Select a wire

Select wires to project: Select another wire or press ENTER
Select target surfaces: Select a surface
Select target surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER

Project To Surface Dialog Box

284 | Chapter 1 Commands

Direction
Defines the direction of the projection.
View
Projects the wire perpendicular to the view in the active viewport. This
option is used most often.
Normal to Surface
Projects the wire perpendicular to the surface. If the surface is curved, the
relative size of the wire can be stretched or shrunk as it is projected. This option
is often used to project edited surface trim lines for retrimming a surface.
Normal to UCS
Projects the wire normal to the current UCS, straight into or out of the plane
specified by the UCS, regardless of which view is active.
Vector Prompts
Provides prompts on the command line to specify the direction of the
projection.
Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]:
Choose an option, or specify a start point

Start Point
Specifies a start point on screen.
Specify end point: Specify an endpoint to determine the direction

Viewdir
Uses the current view direction.
Wire
Specifies a direction, based on a selected wire.
Select wire to define direction: Select a wire

X/Y/Z
Specifies a direction along the X, Y, or Z axis of the current UCS.

Output Type
Determines the result of projecting the selected wire onto a surface. Trims a
surface or shapes a wire.

AMPROJECT | 285
 Trim Surface
Trims the surface with the selected wire.

wire selected surface trimmed

NOTE Pick the surface on the side you want to retain when it is trimmed.

Augmented Line
Shapes the wire according to the surface to create a 3D polyline with vectors.
The vectors are normal to the surface at each vertex.

wire selected augmented line projected

Polyline
Shapes the wire according to the surface to create a 3D polyline.

wire selected 3D polyline projected

Options
Opens the Surface Projection Options dialog box, which controls how the
wire is projected onto the surface.

286 | Chapter 1 Commands

Surface Projection Options Dialog Box

Spacing
Controls the spacing of the points in the wire that results from the projection.

NOTE This option is available only when Output is set to Polyline or

Augmented Line.

Optimal
Inserts points into the resulting wire to hold the surface shape. If you project
a flat, 2-point line onto a surface, enough points are added to maintain the
curvature of the surface. The number of points added is based on the system
tolerance, AMSFTOL.
Pt. to Pt.
Projects only the points in the selected wire onto the surface. If the selected
wire lacks sufficient points to carry the shape of the surface, the shape of the
resulting 3D polyline does not match the surface. Using the Point to Point
option with the Trim Surface option gives unpredictable results.

Taper Angle
Applies a draft value to the wire as it is projected onto the surface. If the wire
is a closed loop, applying a positive taper angle creates a wire that is larger
than the original. Applying a negative taper angle to a closed loop creates a
smaller wire.
For projected wires that are not closed, the results depend on the direction of
the projection. A positive taper value causes the wire to expand to the right
side, when walking down the wire from the beginning to the end and looking
down the projection direction.
The Spacing option you choose affects the taper angle.

NOTE The Taper Angle option is available only when you choose the Normal
to Surface or View, UCS, or Vector options.

AMPROJECT | 287
AMPROJECT2PLN
Projects planar objects and 3D faces to a work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face

Use AMPROJECT2PLN to project planar objects and face edges to a selected

work plane, sketch plane, or 3D face.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Project Objects to Plane.
Toolbutton Project to Plane
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Project Objects to Plane
Command AMPROJECT2PLN

Projection Options Dialog Box

Projection of
Specifies which type of objects to project, 2D objects or 3D face edges.

Projection to
Specifies whether objects will be projected to a work plane, sketch plane, or
3D face edges.

288 | Chapter 1 Commands

Work Plane
Projects selected objects to a specified work plane.
Projecting a Select Workplane: Specify a work plane
2D Object to a Select objects: Specify an object to project
Work Plane Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER
Projecting a Select Workplane: Specify a work plane
3D Face to a Select edge: Specify an edge
Work Plane Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
Sketch Plane
Projects selected objects to the current sketch plane.
Projecting a Select objects: Specify an object to project
2D Object to a Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER
Sketch Plane
Projecting a Select edge: Specify an edge
3D Face to a Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
Sketch Plane Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
3D Face
Projects selected face edges to a specified 3D face.
Projecting a Select plane-defining 3D-face: Specify a face
2D Object to a Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
3D Face Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
Select objects: Specify an object to project
Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER
Projecting a Select plane-defining 3D-face: Specify a face
3D Face to a Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
3D Face Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
Select edge: Specify an edge
Choose the geometry you wish [Next]<Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER

AMPROJECT2PLN | 289
AMRECOVER
Audits a file and fixes any errors

Use AMRECOVER to audit a file. This audit examines Mechanical Desktop

drawing files and corrects any errors. Use AMRECOVER if data has been prob-
lematic or crashes have occurred when you are loading certain files. Use
Desktop Options to set automatic audit options.
When you use AMRECOVER, the Recover Drawing dialog box is displayed.
Command AMRECOVER

Recover Drawing Dialog Box

Look in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the file name of the selected file.

Files of Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area is blank if you do not
select a file, if you select a file that is not an AutoCAD file, or if you select a
file from a previous version of AutoCAD.

290 | Chapter 1 Commands

Locate
Searches for the file name you enter in the File Name window.

Find File
Displays the Browse/Search dialog box.

Browse/Search Dialog Box

Browses through your folders or searches for a specific drawing file.

Browse Tab

File Name
Displays the file name of the drawing you select.
Directories
Specifies the name of the folder to look in.
Drives
Specifies the name of the disk drive to look in.
List Files of Type
Specifies the file type to look for.
Size
Changes the size of the preview image to small, medium, or large.
Network
Opens the Map Network Drive dialog box.

AMRECOVER | 291
 Map Network Drive Dialog Box

Drive
Specifies the drive to map the network drive to on your machine.
Path
Specifies the network location to map.
Reconnect at Logon
Specifies whether to reconnect the network drive each time you log on.

Search Tab

Search Pattern
Specifies the name of a specific file to search for. Wild cards are valid.
File Types
Specifies the type of file to search for.
Date Filter
Searches for drawings by date.

292 | Chapter 1 Commands

Search Location
Specifies where to look for the drawing file.
Drive Specifies the drive to search.
All Drives Specifies all local or all fixed drives to search.
Path Specifies a path to search.
Edit Opens the Edit Path dialog box.
Search Initiates the search.

Edit Path Dialog Box

Path
Displays the current path.

Directories
Provides a means of searching for a specific directory.

Drives
Specifies the drive to search.

Search Path
Specifies the path to search.

Add
Adds a selected directory to the search path.

Delete
Deletes a selected directory from the search path.

AMRECOVER | 293
 Delete All
Deletes all selected directories from the search path.

Network
Opens the Map Network Drive dialog box.

AMREFDIM
Creates Drawing mode reference dimensions between part edges created in Model
mode, and a limited set of objects created in Drawing mode

Use AMREFDIM in Drawing mode to create reference dimensions between the

part edges created in Model mode and the following entities created in
Drawing mode:

■ Lines
■ Arcs
■ Circles
■ Ellipses
■ Centerlines

NOTE Before Drawing mode entities can be used in a reference dimension,

they must be associated to a drawing view.

line created and attached to view reference dimension created

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Reference
Dimension.
Toolbutton Reference Dimension
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Reference Dimension
Command AMREFDIM

294 | Chapter 1 Commands

Select first object: Select first object
Select second object or place dimension: Select second object or place dimension
Specify placement point or [Undo/Hor/Ver/Align/Par/aNgle/Ord/reF/Basic]:
Specify another point to relocate the dimension, choose an option, or press ENTER
Select first object: Place another dimension or press ENTER

Undo
Undoes the previous selection.

Hor
Forces a horizontal dimension.

Ver
Forces a vertical dimension.

Align
Forces an aligned dimension.

Par
Forces a parallel dimension.

Angle
Forces an angular dimension.

Ord
Forces an ordinate dimension.

Ref
Places dimension text in brackets.

Basic
Places a box around the dimension text.

Placement Point
Allows you to respecify the dimension location.

AMREFDIM | 295
AMREFINE3D
Changes the point density of lines and 3D polylines

Use AMREFINE3D to refine lines and polylines used to create surfaces. Drawings
containing polyline data that has been digitized, such as data received from an
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) translator, often have too many
vertices.
Fitting a surface to a polyline with more vertices than are necessary for
expressing its 3D shape may result in too many internal patches on the
surface, poor surfaces, or a decrease in system performance.
A polyline with too few points may create a surface that doesn’t hold the
desired shape. The AMREFINE3D command increases or decreases the number
of points in a polyline to achieve the best surface.

before AMREFINE3D after AMREFINE3D

Toolbutton Refine Wire

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Refine
Command AMREFINE3D

Select lines or polylines to refine: Select a line or polyline

Select lines or polylines to refine: Select another line or polyline, or press ENTER
Enter tolerance or [Points] <0.0010>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance
Reduces the point density of a polyline by applying the specified tolerance to
each vertex in the polyline. Vertices outside the specified tolerance are
deleted.
A higher tolerance reduces the number of points defining the polyline.

Points
Reduces or increases the point density of a polyline or line by removing or
adding points. To manipulate a straight line, add points which you can then
move using grips.
Enter number of points <5>: Specify a value

296 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMREFINESF
Refines surfaces by increasing or decreasing the number of U and V patches

Use AMREFINESF to create a new bi-cubic, nonrational, non-offset C2 contin-

uous surface by changing the following:

■ The number of U and V patches

■ The order of the equation of the surface
■ The surface, from rational to nonrational
■ From offset to non-offset

before AMREFINESF after AMREFINESF

Toolbutton Refine Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Refine
Command AMREFINESF

Select surfaces: Select a surface

Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER
Tolerance [Uv patches] <0.0010>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance
Regenerates the surface, based on the specified tolerance.

NOTE The default tolerance is set to the value of the AMSFTOL system variable.

UV Patches
Rebuilds the surface with the specified number of patches. The default number
of patches shown in the prompt is 10, regardless of the actual number of
patches in the original surface. U and V patches are not the same as U and V
lines. The U and V patches are internal and invisible.
U patches <10>: Specify a value
V Patches <10>: Specify a value

AMREFINESF | 297
AMREFRESH
Updates external part or subassembly definitions

Use AMREFRESH to update the external part or subassembly definitions that

have changed since the initial reference or the last refresh command.

NOTE If an externally referenced file references another file, AMREFRESH will

not list it. To work around this, open and save all top-level files to ensure that
nested references are also updated. Use AMAUDIT to detect files that need to be
updated.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤

Refresh.
Toolbutton Update External Refs
Desktop Menu Assembly➤ Assembly ➤ Refresh
Command AMREFRESH

Refresh External Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

Select External Part/Subassembly to Refresh

Specifies the external part definitions (references) that are out of date and
need to be updated.

298 | Chapter 1 Commands

 All
Specifies that all out-of-date, external part definitions are to be updated. Use
AMASSEMBLE to resolve the constraints and update the assembly.

NOTE If all external parts are up to date, the Refresh External Part/Subassembly
dialog box does not appear. Instead, an AutoCAD Message dialog box appears,
indicating that all external parts and subassemblies are up to date.

AMRENAME
Renames an active part definition, part instance, scene, or drawing view

Use AMRENAME to rename part definitions, part instances, and scenes in

Model mode, and drawing views in Drawing mode.

Renaming a Part Instance

Browser Right-click a part instance and choose Rename.
Toolbutton Rename Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Rename
Command AMRENAME

Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>:

Press ENTER
Select part instance to rename or [?] <PART1_1>:
Enter ? for a list of parts, specify a part name, or press ENTER
Enter new name for part instance: Enter a new name

If you use the Browser method, the prompts do not appear.

Renaming a Part Definition

Command AMRENAME

Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Enter d

Select part definition to rename or [?] <PART1>:
Enter ? for a list of parts, specify a part name, or press ENTER

AMRENAME | 299
 Rename Definition Dialog Box

Old Name
Lists the existing part definition name.

New Name
Specifies the new name for the part definition.

Instance Renaming
Specifies whether instances are also renamed.
No Instances
No instances are renamed.
Only Instances with Like Prefix
Only instances with the same prefix as the part definition are renamed.
All Instances
All instances are renamed.

Renaming a Scene
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose
Rename.
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Rename Scene
Command AMRENAME

300 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Enter an option [part Definition/part Instance/Scene] <part Instance>: Enter s
Enter scene to rename or [?] <SCENE1>:
Enter ? for a list of scenes, specify a scene name, or press ENTER
Enter new name for scene <?>:
Specify a new name for the scene, or press ENTER for a list

If you use the Browser method, the prompts do not appear.

Renaming a Drawing View

Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a view icon and choose
Rename.

AMREORDFEAT
Changes the order of a feature in the part creation history

Use AMREORDFEAT to change the order of a feature in the part hierarchy.

before AMREORDFEAT

after AMREORDFEAT

AMREORDFEAT | 301
 Browser In the Model tab, click a feature and drag it to a different
location in the part hierarchy.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features
➤ Reorder.
Toolbutton Reorder Feature
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Reorder Feature
Command AMREORDFEAT

Select feature to reorder: Select the feature to reorder

Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER
Select destination feature: Select the destination feature
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER

If you choose the Browser method, and try to reorder a feature to a location
that is inconsistent with other features, a circle with a diagonal line through
it is displayed, and you are prevented from reordering the feature. Move the
feature to a location that is allowed. If you use the Toolbutton, Desktop
Menu, or Command method, you cannot reorder the feature to an inconsis-
tent location.

AMREPLACE
Changes definitions for part or subassembly instances

Use AMREPLACE to replace selected instances with other parts or subassemblies.

The parts or subassemblies must be referenced into the drawing before they
can be used to replace instances.

before AMREPLACE after AMREPLACE

NOTE If the selected part or subassembly instances have associated assembly

constraints, the Verify Replace dialog box is displayed to warn you that the new
instances need to be reconstrained after the replacement.

302 | Chapter 1 Commands

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤
Replace.
Toolbutton Replace Part
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Replace
Command AMREPLACE

Replace Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

Replace
Specifies the part or subassembly instance to replace. To select more than one
definition, use Shift or Control while selecting.

All Instances
Specifies that all instances of the same type are to be replaced by the specified
definition.

Pick
Closes the dialog box temporarily and displays a prompt for selecting the
part or subassembly with the cursor. After you select a part or subassembly,
the dialog box is redisplayed, with the name of the selected part highlighted
under Replace.

With
Specifies the replacement part or subassembly.

AMREPLACE | 303
AMREPLACEDGE
Replaces a surface edge with an edge of another surface

Use AMREPLACEDGE to replace a surface edge with the edge of another surface.
AMREPLACEDGE trims the selected surface to the apparent intersection with a
control surface, or quilted surface, and blends the transition between the two
surfaces.

before AMREPLACEDGE after AMREPLACEDGE

Toolbutton Replace Surface Edge

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Replace Edge
Command AMREPLACEDGE

Select Surface near edge to be replaced: Specify a surface

Select control Surface (or) Quilt: Specify a surface
Specify Percentage to Blend Back from Edge <20.0000>: Specify a value

AMREPLAY
Displays the steps used to create features of the selected part

Use AMREPLAY to redisplay, in sequence, the steps used to create features of a

selected part.

feature creation replayed

NOTE AMREPLAY includes suppressed features during replay.

304 | Chapter 1 Commands

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤
Replay.
Toolbutton Feature Replay
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Replay
Command AMREPLAY

Select part to replay or <PART1>: Select a part or press ENTER

Enter an option [Display/Exit/Next/Size/Truncate] <Next>:
Choose an option, or press ENTER to cycle to the next step

Display
Available when replay reaches a sketch. Use this option to display 2D sketch
constraints.

Exit
Exits the command.

Next
Advances to the next step in the feature replay.
When AMREPLAY encounters a feature, the following options are displayed:
Enter an option [Exit/Next/suPpress/Truncate] <Next>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Suppress
Suppresses all features created after the current step. When AMREPLAY
encounters a suppressed feature, the following options are displayed:
Feature name (suppressed)
Enter an option [Exit/Next/suPpress to end/Truncate/Unsuppress]<Next>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Suppress to End Suppresses all features created after the current step.
Unsuppress Allows you to manually unsuppress features in the replay
process.

Size
Opens the Constraint Display Size dialog box.

Truncate
Deletes all features created after the current step.

AMREPLAY | 305
 Constraint Display Size Dialog Box
Controls the display size of 2D constraints on screen.

AMRESTOREUCS
Restores a sketch plane associated with a saved UCS

Use AMRESTOREUCS to restore a previously saved UCS and its associated

sketch plane. AMRESTOREUCS uses a block created by AMCAPTUREUCS to
restore UCS settings.
Toolbutton Restore UCS
Desktop Menu Assist ➤ Restore 3D UCS
Command AMRESTOREUCS

Select UCS block: Specify a UCS block

AMREVOLVE
Creates a revolved solid feature from the selected profile

Use AMREVOLVE to revolve a profile about a selected axis to create a solid feature.
An axis can be a model edge, a work axis, or a sketched line included in the
profile. If the sketched line is not part of the profile boundary, its linetype must
be different from the linetype associated with the system variable AMSKSTYLE.

axis

profile revolved feature

306 | Chapter 1 Commands

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Revolve.
Toolbutton Revolve
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Revolve
Command AMREVOLVE

Select profile: Specify a profile

Select revolution axis: Specify an axis

If only one profile exists, or if you are using the Browser method, the first
prompt does not appear.

Revolution Dialog Box

Operation
Determines the Boolean operation of the revolution.
Base
Adds material, creating the first feature in a part.
Cut
Cuts the revolved volume from the active part.
Join
Adds the revolved volume to the active part.
Intersect
Creates a new feature from the shared volume between the existing part and
the revolved feature.
Split
Creates a new part from the shared volume between the existing part and the
revolved feature.

Termination
Determines the method for ending the revolution.

AMREVOLVE | 307
 By Angle
Revolves the profile to a specified angle and displays direction arrows.
Full
Revolves the profile 360 degrees.
To Face/Plane
Revolves the profile to a specified planar face or work plane.
Select face or work plane: Select a face or work plane
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Choose an option, or select a work plane or planar face
Enter termination type [Face/Plane] <Face>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Face Terminates the feature at the selected face.

Plane Terminates the feature at the selected plane.
Mid Plane
Revolves the profile equally in both directions, terminating at the specified
overall angle.
From_To
Defines the origin and destination faces.
Select face or work plane (first termination): Specify a face or work plane
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Enter n or press ENTER
Enter termination type [Face/Plane] <Face>: Choose an option or press ENTER
Select face or work plane (second termination): Specify a face or work plane
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Enter n or press ENTER

Flip
Flips the direction of the revolution.

Angle
Specifies the angle of revolution. The default angle is 90 degrees.

308 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMREVOLVESF
Creates a surface by rotating a path wire around a selected axis

Use AMREVOLVESF to create a surface of revolution by rotating any number

of path curves, or closed loops, around a selected axis. AMREVOLVESF creates
a NURBS surface which meets the design criterion of C1 (smooth) continuity.
Revolved surfaces have grips. To move a revolved surface, select its grip point
and specify a new location for the surface.

NOTE AMREVOLVESF creates rational surfaces only.

The path curve defines the U direction of the surface. Valid curves are lines,
arcs, splines, and polylines. Selecting a closed polyline as the path curve
creates a surface that is closed in the U direction.

path and axis revolved surface

Toolbutton Revolved Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Revolve
Command AMREVOLVESF

Select path curves to revolve: Select a curve

Select path curves to revolve: Select another curve or press ENTER
Specify axis start point or [Wire]:
Enter w to select a wire, or specify a start point for the axis

AMREVOLVESF | 309
 Start Point of Axis
Specifies the start point of an axis on screen.
Specify axis end point: Specify a second point
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

Wire
Uses the wire you select as the axis of revolution.
Select wire to define axis: Select a wire
Enter start angle <0>: Specify a value or press ENTER
Enter included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <Full circle>: Specify a value or press ENTER

The selected axis of revolution determines the V direction of the surface. If

you select a polyline, the actual segment you select becomes the rotation
axis, and all other vertices are ignored.

Start Angle/Included Angle

The start angle specifies where the revolution starts, relative to the path
curve. If you specify a start angle other than 0, the revolution starts at a
position from the path curve defined by that angle.
The included angle specifies how far the surface extends around the axis of
revolution. A negative angle revolves the surface in a clockwise manner. A
positive angle revolves the surface in a counterclockwise manner.

AMROTCENTER
Calculates a new center of rotation at the 3D center of all visible objects

Use AMROTCENTER to calculate a new center of rotation of all visible objects.

This includes Parts, Assemblies, NURBS Surfaces and AutoCAD wires. The
new center of rotation stays in effect until the command is repeated or the
select rotation center (AMSELROT) command is initiated.
Toolbutton New Rotation Center
Command AMROTCENTER

310 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMRSOLVESK
Displays the number of constraints needed to fully constrain a sketch, or appends new
geometry to a sketch

Use AMRSOLVESK to re-solve consumed and unconsumed sketches or append

geometry to existing sketches.

Re-Solving a Sketch
Use AMRSOLVESK to re-solve a single unconsumed path, profile, cut line, or
split line. The number of constraints required to fully constrain it is displayed.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Re-Solve.
Toolbutton Re-Solve Sketch
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Re-Solve
Command AMRSOLVESK

Enter an option [Append/Solve sketch] <Solve sketch>: Press ENTER

Appending a Sketch
Use AMRSOLVESK to add new geometry to a selected path, profile, cut line, or
split line, and display the number of constraints required to fully constrain it.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Append.
Toolbutton Append to Sketch
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Append
Enter an option [Append/Solve sketch] <Solve sketch>: Enter a
Select geometry to append to sketch: Select an object to append to the sketch
Select geometry to append to sketch:
Select another object to append to the sketch or press ENTER

AMRSOLVESK | 311
AMRULE
Creates a straight element surface between two wires

Use AMRULE to create a surface consisting of noncurving elements in the V

direction. AMRULE uses only two wires to construct the surface. The resulting
surface is a NURBS surface.
Valid wires include lines, arcs, splines, polylines, circles, ellipses, augmented
lines, and surfaces.
Toolbutton Ruled Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Rule
Command AMRULE

Select first wire: Select the first wire

Select second wire: Select the second wire

wires selected ruled surface

AMSCALE
Scales wires and surfaces along their axes by a specified factor

Use AMSCALE to scale wires and surfaces along their axes, either individually
or uniformly.
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Surface ➤ Scale
Command AMSCALE

Select wires and surfaces: Select a wire or a surface

Select wires and surfaces: Select another wire or surface, or press ENTER
Scaling: [Independent/Uniform] <Uniform>: Enter i or press ENTER

312 | Chapter 1 Commands

Uniform
Uniformly scales the selected wire(s) or surface(s) along all three axes.
Scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a scale factor
Locate origin<0.000000,0.000000,0.000000>: Specify an origin

original surface uniformly scaled

Independent
Scales the selected wire(s) or surface(s) independently along each of three
axes.
X scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a value
Y scale factor <1.0000>: Specify a value
Z scale factor <2.0000>: Specify a value
Locate origin<0.000000,0.000000,0.000000>: Specify an origin

original surface independently scaled

AMSCALE | 313
AMSECTION
Creates section cuts through one or more surfaces

Use AMSECTION to cut a single cross section or a group of cross sections from
a set of surfaces you select. AMSECTION produces sections that can be plotted
as a series of incremental cross sections.
AMSECTION is useful for visualizing and inspecting a surface and for designing
3D products. For example, you can cut a section through an automobile to
check clearances for adjacent components.
To section a surface with AMSECTION, you first orient the section cuts by
establishing the initial plane at any angle. The initial plane is the base cutting
plane for the first section cut. AMSECTION interprets all input relative to the
initial plane.
Toolbutton Section Cuts
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Wireframe ➤ Section Cuts
Command AMSECTION

Select surfaces: Select a surface

Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER

Surface Cross Sections Dialog Box

Section Type
Specifies the type of cut to make.

314 | Chapter 1 Commands

Single
Cuts only one section.
Parallel
Cuts multiple sections parallel to one another and to the initial plane.
Parallel sections begin at the initial plane and terminate at the specified
distance from it. After you establish the location and orientation of the first
section, define the remaining section cuts with the Step and Stop options
under Multiple Cuts. The Parallel option interprets both Step and Stop as
distances.
Radial
Cuts multiple sections by rotating the initial plane about its X axis.
After you establish the location and orientation of the first section, define the
remaining section cuts with the Stop and Step options under Multiple Cuts.
The Radial option interprets both Step and Stop as angles.

single section parallel sections radial sections

NOTE The orientation of the surface has been adjusted for clarity.

Initial Plane
Establishes the initial plane used to generate the sections. Once you have
established the initial plane, all other input to AMSECTION is relative to this
plane.
View Direction
Establishes the initial plane perpendicular to the plane of the active view-
port. After selecting this option, choose Define. Digitize a two-point cut line
that cuts the surface straight into the screen. This option is dependent on the
current view, which must be established before you start AMSECTION.

NOTE Look at your model in another view to see the multiple cuts made in
the current view direction.

AMSECTION | 315
 UCS Plane
Establishes the initial plane directly on the XY plane of the current user coor-
dinate system (UCS). Choose Define to change the origin of the UCS.
Position the UCS exactly where you want to cut one or more sections. In the
case of radial sections, the X axis of the UCS becomes the pivot for the radial
sections. You are returned to your original UCS after the sections are cut.
Define
Specifies the direction of the initial plane.
Locate first point: Specify a point
Locate second point: Specify a second point

Multiple Cuts
Specifies whether multiple cuts are created.
Stop
Sets the total distance to be covered with parallel sections, starting from the
initial plane. Sets the total angle to be covered with radial sections, starting
from the initial plane.
To enter a distance or angle, use the Locate Stop button to digitize a screen
location or enter coordinate values.
Step
Sets the incremental distance between parallel sections or sets the incremental
angle between radial sections. The step value must be less than or equal to the
stop value.

NOTE Stop and Step are not available if you selected the Single option.

Locate Stop
Displays prompts for you to graphically locate the distance or angle to be
covered with parallel or radial sections, respectively.

Output
Determines whether the output sections are augmented lines or 3D polylines
and whether they are offset from the surface. You can also save the output.
Augmented
Creates the section cuts with augmented lines instead of 3D polylines. Inter-
nally, the augmented vectors are the size of one unit of measurement, but
they are displayed according to the current value of AMVECSF.
Offset
Creates section cuts normal to the surface and at a specific distance from the
surface.

316 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Save
Retains section cuts as part of a group.
Group
Specifies the name of the group to associate to the section cuts.

AMSELROT
Calculates a new center of rotation by allowing the user to specify a point for the rotation

Use AMSELROT to calculate a new center of rotation of all visible objects. This
includes Parts, Assemblies, NURBS surfaces and AutoCAD wires. The new
center of rotation stays in effect until the command is repeated or the new
rotation center command (AMROTCENTER) is initiated.
Toolbutton Select Rotation Center
Command AMSELROT

Select rotation center <8.0188, 4.5000, 0.0000>:

Enter X, Y, Z coordinates or manually select a point

AMSHELL
Creates a shell feature with an assigned wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses

Use AMSHELL to create a shelled feature on the active part. You can assign an
overall wall thickness or multiple wall thicknesses and select faces to exclude.

before AMSHELL after AMSHELL

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed

Features ➤ Shell.
Toolbutton Shell
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Shell
Command AMSHELL

AMSELROT | 317
 Shell Feature Dialog Box

Default Thickness
Specifies values for the wall thickness of the shell and which faces, if any, to
exclude.
Inside
Specifies the wall thickness, using the part faces as the outside walls of the shell.
Outside
Specifies the wall thickness, using the part faces as the inside walls of the shell.
Midplane
Specifies the wall thickness of the shell, using the part faces as the midplane
of the shell.
Excluded Faces
Specifies the faces to exclude from the shell feature.
Add Closes the Shell Feature dialog box temporarily so that
you can add faces to exclude from the shell.
Select faces to exclude: Select a face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next available face, or press ENTER
Select faces to exclude: Select another face or press ENTER
Reclaim Closes the Shell Feature dialog box temporarily so that
you can reclaim the excluded faces.
Select faces to reclaim: Select a face
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n or press ENTER
Select faces to reclaim: Select another face or press ENTER

318 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Multiple Thickness Overrides
Specifies values for multiple wall thicknesses.
Thickness
Specifies a value to apply to individual faces, to override the default thickness.
Set
Creates or deletes override values.
Faces
Specifies faces to apply multiple thickness overrides to or to reclaim faces
from a set to which overrides have been applied.

Reset
Resets all values in the Shell Feature dialog box to default values.

AMSHOWACT
Highlights the active part or sketch plane

Use AMSHOWACT to highlight the active part or active sketch plane.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part ➤ Show
Active Part.
Toolbutton Show Active
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part ➤ Show Active Part
Command AMSHOWACT

Enter an option [Sketchplane/Part] <Part>:

Choose an option and press ENTER to continue

Part
Highlights the active part.

Sketch Plane
Highlights the active sketch plane, if one exists.
After the sketch plane or part has been highlighted, press ENTER to exit the
command.

AMSHOWACT | 319
AMSHOWCON
Displays 2D constraint symbols on the selected sketch

Use AMSHOWCON to display the 2D constraints that already exist on a

selected sketch and to assist in fully constraining the sketch.

2D constraints

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose 2D

Constraints ➤ Show Constraints.
Toolbutton Show Constraints
Desktop Menu Part ➤ 2D Constraints ➤ Show Constraints
Command AMSHOWCON

Enter an option [All/Select/Next/eXit] <eXit>: Choose an option or press ENTER

All
Displays all constraints for the selected sketch.

Select
Displays constraints for selected objects in the active sketch.
Select objects in active sketch.
Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER to display the constraints

Next
Displays constraints by cycling through the selected objects.
Select objects in active sketch.
Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER to continue
Select constraint or [Exit/Next] <Next>:
Choose an option or press ENTER to cycle through the constraints

Exit
Exits the command.

320 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSHOWINST
Highlights selected part instances in the Desktop Browser

Use AMSHOWINST to highlight selected part instances in the Desktop

Browser. This command is very useful for locating specific instances in the
Browser, when you are working in large assembly files.
Command AMSHOWINST

Select an instance: Select a part

The selected part instance is displayed and highlighted in the Desktop

Browser.

AMSHOWSKETCH
Highlights geometry on the current sketch plane

Use AMSHOWSKETCH to highlight geometry on the current sketch plane.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Highlight Sketch Plane Entities.
Toolbutton Highlights Sketch Data
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Highlight Sketch Plane Entities
Command AMSHOWSKETCH

Select objects: Specify the objects to consider

Select objects: Specify more objects or press ENTER

AMSHOWSKETCH highlights valid geometry. Press ENTER to end the command.

AMSHOWINST | 321
AMSKPLN
Sets the sketch plane location and XY axes orientation

Use AMSKPLN to specify the sketch plane location and the orientation of the XY
axes. You can sketch a feature profile, path, cut line, or split line on the active
part on this plane. Sketch planes can be placed on planar (flat) faces of the active
part, on work planes, or on planes defined by a user coordinate system (UCS).
The sketch plane is an infinite plane on which the next feature is sketched.
The orientation of the X and Y axes on the sketch plane determines the
orientation of the horizontal and vertical constraints. Use the Z-flip option
to change the direction of the Z axis of the UCS along the axis that is aligned
with the selected edge.
A temporary sketch plane graphic appears on screen, on the plane you have
specified. You can select a part edge, a work plane edge, or a work axis to
reorient the XY axes. Select the directional arrow to reorient the Z direction.

temporary sketch plane graphic

NOTE You can use the animated cursor to cycle through the available options.

Browser Right-click in the background and choose New Sketch

Plane.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Sketch
Plane.
Toolbutton New Sketch Plane
Desktop Menu Part ➤ New Sketch Plane
Command AMSKPLN

Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:

Choose an option, or select a part face or a work plane

322 | Chapter 1 Commands

Select Work Plane or Planar Face
Choose a face on the active part, or choose a work plane. Valid faces will be
highlighted as the cursor approaches them.
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next face, or press ENTER
Plane=Parametric
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldXy
Uses the XY plane of the World Coordinate System (WCS).
Plane=World XY
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldYz
Uses the YZ plane of the WCS.
Plane=World YZ
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

WorldZx
Uses the ZX plane of the WCS.
Plane=World ZX
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

Ucs
Uses the XY plane of the current UCS.
Plane=UCS
Select edge to align X axis or [Z-flip/Rotate] <accept>:
Choose an option, select an edge, or press ENTER

Z-flip
Changes the direction of the Z axis of the sketch plane.
Rotate
Rotates the XY axes of the sketch plane.

AMSKPLN | 323
 Using the Animated Cursor
When you create a sketch plane, you can use the animated cursor to auto-
mate the selection process.

Cycling
When the cursor is displayed with rotational arrows, use the left mouse
button to cycle through the available options. Use the right mouse button to
accept your selection.

UCS Orientation
When the cursor is displayed with rotating axes, use the left mouse button to
rotate the XY axes. Use the right mouse button to accept your selection.

AMSOLCUT
Cuts an AutoCAD solid model with a Mechanical Desktop surface

Use AMSOLCUT to integrate free-form surface shapes with solid models, effec-
tively creating a sculptured solid. AMSOLCUT essentially trims any AutoCAD
solid object to the intersection of a Mechanical Desktop surface. The surface
must extend beyond all faces of the AutoCAD solid, or the solid will not be
trimmed.
See “AMSURFCUT” on page 340 for information about cutting surfaces from
parametric solid models.
The resultant solid is a valid AutoCAD solid object. You can use AutoCAD
solid operations, such as filleting along an edge, Boolean operations, and
AMSOLCUT to refine the solid.

before AMSOLCUT after AMSOLCUT

324 | Chapter 1 Commands

 To cut a solid with more than one surface, either join the surfaces or cut the
solid with one surface at a time. Surfaces can be joined only along
untrimmed edges. See “AMJOINSF” on page 192.

NOTE A direction arrow points from the surface to the side of the solid that
will be removed.

Toolbutton Solid Cut

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Solid
Command AMSOLCUT

Select solid to cut: Specify a solid

Select surface: Specify a surface
Portion to remove [Accept/Flip] <Accept>: Enter f to flip direction or press ENTER

AMSPLITLINE
Solves an open or closed line sketch to divide a part or a face

Use AMSPLITLINE to split a part using a sketch projected onto a set of faces.
When a split line is created, the sketch is consumed by the split feature. A
new Split Line icon is added to the Browser.

split line

Multiple, unconsumed split lines can exist for one part.

Use AMPARTSPLIT to split a part using a split line. After the split is completed,
draft can be applied to the faces on each side of the split line.

AMSPLITLINE | 325
 Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketch
Solving ➤ Split Line.
Toolbutton Split Line
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketch Solving ➤ Split Line
Command AMSPLITLINE

Select objects: Select the geometry for the split line

Select edge to include in splitline or press ENTER to accept:
Select a part edge, or press ENTER
Solved underconstrained sketch requiring n dimensions or constraints.

When the split line has been solved, use AMFACESPLIT to project the split line
to the desired surfaces.

AMSTITCH
Stitches surfaces together and heals gaps between existing surfaces

Use AMSTITCH to stitch surfaces together and heal gaps between existing
surfaces.
Toolbutton Stitches Surfaces
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Surface Stitching
Command AMSTITCH

Select objects to be stitched: Specify a surface

Select objects to be stitched: Specify another surface or press ENTER

Surface Stitching Dialog Box

326 | Chapter 1 Commands

Stitching Type
Controls the type of stitching that is performed.
Optimal Stitching
Stitches and simplifies objects, using optimal settings. The Custom settings
for stitching, healing, and simplifying are not available.
Custom Stitching
Specifies tolerances for each type of stitching function: stitching, healing,
and simplifying objects. You access the custom settings by selecting the
Settings button in the dialog box.

Operation
Controls the operation that is performed.
Stitch Surfaces
Stitches surfaces together.
Heal Gaps
Heals the gaps between selected surfaces.
Simplify Objects
Simplifies the selected surfaces.

Enclosed Surfaces Output

Controls whether the output is to a part or to a quilted surface.
Part
Outputs stitched surfaces to a solid model.
Quilt
Outputs stitched surfaces to a surface quilt.

Preview
Provides an on-screen preview of the stitch operation.

Settings
Opens the Custom Settings dialog box, where you can control the display of
the stitched surface output and the tolerances that are applied, when the
stitch calculation is made.

Custom Settings Dialog Box

The Custom Settings dialog box contains two tabs: Stitch/Heal/Simplify and
Display.

AMSTITCH | 327
 Stitch/Heal/Simplify Tab

Option
Specifies the function the settings are applied to: stitch, heal, or simplify.
Reset
Resets the settings to their default values.
Settings
Controls the settings for the specified function.

Display Tab

Preview Settings
Controls the colors of resultant edges, tolerant edges, spline geometry, original
entities, bad edges, bad faces, and bad vertices.

328 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSTLOUT
Outputs solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies to the STL format used for stereo
lithography

Use AMSTLOUT to create output files of solids, regions, parts, and subassemblies
for stereo lithography. The STL format reduces an entire model into multiple
flat facets that approximate its shape.
Command AMSTLOUT

Select object: Specify a solid, region, part, or subassembly

Angular tolerance=15.0000 aSpect ratio=0.0000 sUrface tolerance=0.0000
Vertex spacing=0.0000
Enter an option [Angular tolerance/aSpect ratio/sUrface tolerance/Vertex
spacing] <continue>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Angular Tolerance
The surface normal of each facet of the model is compared to the surface
normal of each adjacent facet. These normals are not allowed to deviate more
than the value in degrees set by this option.
Enter maximum facet angle deviation (degrees) <15.0000>: Enter a value

The default setting of 15 degrees may produce very coarse output, depending
on the size of the part. For large parts, you may find it beneficial to lower the
angular tolerance, especially if a large surface tolerance setting is used, because
smaller features such as holes or fillets may not translate well.

NOTE Lowering this value increases the density of the mesh, resulting in a
large file.

Aspect Ratio
This setting controls the height/width ratio of the facets. A value of 1 forces
the height of a facet to be no greater than its width.
Enter maximum aspect ratio of facets <0.0000>: Enter a value

The default value is 0, meaning that the aspect ratio is not calculated.
The aspect ratio does not affect planar faces, but this setting is sometimes
needed to avoid "sliver" facets, or long slender facets, that may be created
when translating long, cylindrical parts.

AMSTLOUT | 329
 Surface Tolerance
This setting has the greatest effect on the STL output. The surface tolerance
controls the chordal deviation, or the maximum distance allowed between
the edge of a facet and the face’s actual surface or edge geometry. It is the
maximum allowable deviation that the faceted output can deviate from the
actual surface.
Enter maximum surface deviation <0.0000>: Enter a value

The default setting is 0, meaning that the surface tolerance is not calculated.

Vertex Spacing
This setting controls the maximum distance allowed between the adjacent
vertices of a facet. For example, if a vertex spacing value of 1 is used, no facet
can have an edge that is more than 1 unit long.
Enter maximum distance between vertices <0.0000>: Enter a value

The default setting is 0, which means that vertex spacing is not calculated.

Save File Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the location for the output file.

File Name
Specifies the name of the output file.

Save as Type
Specifies the type of file to create.

330 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSTYLEI
Imports dimension styles defined in any DWG file without your having to attach and
detach or insert an entire drawing

Use AMSTYLEI in Drawing mode to import dimension styles from other draw-
ings without inserting the entire drawing.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit
Dimensions ➤ Style Importer.
Toolbutton Style Importer
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Edit Dimensions ➤ Style Importer
Command AMSTYLEI

AMSTYLEI opens the Select Drawing dialog box, where you choose the drawing
from which to import dimension styles. Then, it opens the Dim Style Importer
dialog box.

Select Drawing Dialog Box

Look in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the name of the selected file.

Files of Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

AMSTYLEI | 331
 Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area is blank if you do not
select a file, if you select a file that is not an AutoCAD file, or if you select a
file from a previous version of AutoCAD.

Locate
Searches for the file name displayed in the File Name field.

Find File
Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. See “AMRECOVER” on page 290.

Dim Style Importer Dialog Box

Dimension Styles to Import

Displays the dimension styles available to import.

Current Dimension Styles

Displays the dimension styles available in the current drawing.
To import a dimension style, select a style from the Dimension Styles to
Import list, and click the arrow button. The style name appears in the Current
Dimension Styles list. If the style being imported duplicates the name of a
current style, the Substitute Dimension Style Name dialog box is displayed.

332 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Substitute Dimension Style Name Dialog Box

New Name
Specifies a new name for the imported dimension style.

AMSUPPRCOLOR
Controls the color of suppressed dimensions and DOF symbols

Use AMSUPPRCOLOR to control the color of dimensions with soft dependencies

to suppressed features and the color of the DOF symbols on parts with
suppressed assembly constraints.
Command AMSUPPRCOLOR

AMSUPPRCOLOR opens the AutoCAD Select Color dialog box. Select a color.
For more information about changing colors, see the AutoCAD User’s Guide.
You can also use AMOPTIONS to access AMSUPPRCOLOR. See “AMOPTIONS”
on page 232.

AMSUPPRCOLOR | 333
AMSUPPRESS
Suppresses the display of instances in a scene

Use AMSUPPRESS to suppress the display of part instances in a scene-based

section view.
Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a part icon and choose
Section Suppressed.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene ➤
Suppress Sections.
Toolbutton Suppress Sections
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene ➤ Suppress Sections
Command AMSUPPRESS

NOTE If you use the Browser method, the part is automatically suppressed. If
you use any other method, the Instance Suppression dialog box is displayed.

Instance Suppression Dialog Box

Active Scene
Displays the active scene name.

334 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Visible Instance
Lists all instances in the active scene and indicates whether they are visible
in section views.

Select All
Selects all instances.

Unselect All
Unselects all instances.

Select
Temporarily closes the Instance Suppression dialog box so that you can select
instances on screen.

Sectioning
Controls the suppression of section views of selected instances.
Suppress
Suppresses section views of selected instances.
Unsuppress
Unsuppresses section views of selected instances.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT
Suppresses features on the active part, either manually or by using an external table

Use AMSUPPRESSFEAT to suppress active part features manually or by using an

external spreadsheet.
Browser Right-click a feature icon and choose Suppress.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Edit Features
➤ Suppress Feature or Edit Features ➤ Suppress by Type.
Toolbutton Suppress Features
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Suppress Feature, or
Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Suppress by Type
Command AMSUPPRESSFEAT

Select a feature to suppress or [By type/Table]:

Choose an option or select a feature

AMSUPPRESSFEAT | 335
 Select Feature
Select feature(s) to suppress.
Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>:
Enter n to cycle to the next feature, or press ENTER
The highlighted features will be suppressed.
Press Enter to continue or [Cancel] <continue>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Continue
Suppresses the highlighted feature(s).
Cancel
Cancels the command.

By Type
Opens the Suppress by Type dialog box.

Table
Opens the Table Driven Setup dialog box.

Suppress by Type Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to control which features to suppress, for the active part
or all parts. Choose the features by type.

Active Part
Suppresses specified features on the active part only.

All Local Parts

Suppresses specified features on all local parts.

336 | Chapter 1 Commands

All Except Base Feature
Suppresses all features except the base feature on the active part only or on
all local parts.

Placed Features
Suppresses all placed features of the specified type(s).

Sketched Features
Suppresses all sketched features of the specified type(s).

Work Features
Suppresses all work features of the specified type(s).

Table Driven Setup Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to generate a spreadsheet for features that are already
suppressed in your drawing. In the Active Part tab, you can add the
suppressed features to an existing spreadsheet by concatenating tables, or
you can create a separate spreadsheet to control their suppression. For a
complete description of the options in this dialog box, see “AMVARS” on
page 380.

Active Part Tab

Layout
Controls the Start Cell and Sheet Name and whether the Version Names
appear in rows or in a column.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT | 337
 Type
Controls whether the table includes variables or suppressed features, or both.
If you choose both, the Format option becomes available.
Format
Specifies whether suppressed features appear in the same table with the vari-
ables or in a separate table.
Create
Opens the Create Table dialog box.
Link
Opens the Link Table dialog box.

Create Table Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the name of the selected file.

Save as Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

338 | Chapter 1 Commands

Link Table Dialog Box

Look in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the name of the selected file.

Files of Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

Locate
Searches for the file name displayed in the File name field.

Find File
Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. See “AMRECOVER” on page 290.

AMSUPPRESSFEAT | 339
AMSURFCUT
Cuts free-form surface shapes on solid models

Use AMSURFCUT to cut free-form surface shapes from Mechanical Desktop

parametric solid models. The surface is associated with a work point so that
it can be parametrically repositioned.
The surface can be associated to a work point constrained to the active part.
If the position of the work point changes, the surface moves, and the part is
parametrically updated.

before AMSURFCUT after AMSURFCUT

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Placed

Features ➤ Surface Cut.
Toolbutton Surface Cut
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Placed Features ➤ Surface Cut
Command AMSURFCUT

Type: Cut
Select surface or [Type]: Enter t or select a surface

Select Surface
Specifies the surface and the work point it is associated to, and then completes
the operation.
Select work point: Specify a work point
Specify portion to remove [Flip/Accept] <Accept>:
Enter f to flip direction or press ENTER

Type
Specifies the type of operation, protrusion, or cut.
Enter an option [Cut/Protrusion] <Protrusion>: Choose an option or press ENTER

340 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Protrusion
Joins the part with the portion of a surface extending above or beyond the
part.
Cut
Cuts material from the part on the specified side of the surface.

AMSURFPROP
Calculates the mass properties of surfaces

Use AMSURFPROP to get information that is essential to analyzing the charac-

teristics of a surfaced model. AMSURFPROP calculates the approximate volume
and surface area of an enclosed model. The mass properties are useful for
determining static and dynamic mechanical behaviors, performing weight
and cost analyses, and getting other information from the model.

NOTE AMSURFPROP calculates values for the sum of the selected surfaces.

Toolbutton Surface Mass Properties

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Utilities ➤ Mass Properties
Command AMSURFPROP

Select surfaces: Select a surface

Select surfaces: Select another surface or press ENTER
Density=1.0000 Thickness=0.0000 tYpe=Shell
Enter an option [Density/Thickness/tYpe] <calculate properties>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Calculate Properties
Opens the AutoSurf Mass Properties dialog box, which displays information
about the selected surface(s).
If Type is set to Shell, the mass and area of the selected surfaces and the
default density, type, and thickness settings are displayed.
If Type is set to Enclosed Model, the mass properties for an enclosed model
are displayed.

Density
Sets the density for the mass properties calculations.
Enter density <1.0000>: Specify a value

AMSURFPROP | 341
 Thickness
Sets the skin thickness of the surface(s).
Enter thickness <0.0000>: Specify a value

Type
Specifies the surface type to analyze.
Enter a type option [Enclosed model/Shell] <Enclosed model>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

Shell
Specifies that the surface(s) does not enclose a volume. Only area and mass
are calculated.
Enclosed Model
Specifies that the surface(s) encloses a volume.

AutoSurf Mass Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for the selected surface(s).

Shell Type

Properties
Shows the mass and area of the selected surface(s).
Settings
Shows the thickness, density, and type of the selected surface(s).

342 | Chapter 1 Commands

Enclosed Model Type

Properties
Shows the mass, volume, and area of the selected surface(s).
Settings
Shows the density and type of the selected surface(s).
Center of Gravity
Displays the center of gravity for the selected surface(s).
Principal Moments
Displays the moments of inertia that correspond to the principal axes.
Principle Axes
Displays the three mutually orthogonal coordinate axes that define a coordi-
nate system in which all products of inertia are zero.
Moments of Inertia
Displays the moments of inertia for the surface(s).

AMSURFPROP | 343
 Products of Inertia
Displays the products of inertia for the surface(s).
Together, the moments of inertia and products of inertia compose the inertia
tensor which is comparable to mass in a mechanical system involving linear
motion.
The inertia tensor relates the angular momentum of a rigid body about a
given axis to its regular velocity. This is necessary in order to perform
dynamic analysis on a mechanical system that involves rotation.
Radii of Gyration
Displays the radii or gyration of the surface(s).
A radius of gyration is the effective distance between the mass and the spec-
ified X, Y, or Z axis.
Write to File
Saves the displayed mass properties information in a file.
File
Opens the Create Mass and Area Properties File dialog box.

Create Mass and Area Properties File Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the directory for the file.

File Name
Displays the name of the specified file.

Save as Type
Displays files with the specified extension type.

344 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSURFSYM
Adds surface texture finish symbols to drawings

Use AMSURFSYM in Drawing mode to create surface texture symbols that

conform to ANSI, BSI, CSN, DIN, GB, ISO, and JIS Drafting Standards. DXF
group codes are assigned to surface texture symbols and allow complete data
exchange.
Surface texture symbols describe variations and tolerances of surface finish.
The symbol controls minimum and maximum roughness, waviness, type of
production method, and appearance or direction of tool marks.

NOTE Before you create surface texture symbols, choose a Drafting Standard
using AMSYMSTD.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤

Surface Texture.
Toolbutton Surface Texture
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Surface Texture
Command AMSURFSYM

Surface Texture Symbols with Leaders

Select object to attach: Specify an object, or select a point
Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

AMSURFSYM | 345
 Surface Texture Symbols without Leaders
Select object to attach: Specify an object, or select a point
Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER
Select Side: Specify a point to orient the symbol

Surface Texture Dialog Box

The Surface Texture dialog box contains two tabs, Symbol and Leader.

Symbol Tab

Surface Type
Specifies the type of surface referenced by the symbol.

■ Basic surface
■ Removal of material required
■ Removal of material prohibited

Miscellaneous
Forces a tail on the surface texture symbol.

346 | Chapter 1 Commands

Surface Texture Symbol Modifiers
In the Symbol tab, you can specify additional values for the surface texture
symbol.

Modifier Description

A’ Roughness Average - Maximum Value

A Roughness Average - Minimum Value

B Production Method

C’ Roughness Cutoff or Sampling Length

C Sampling Length

D Direction of Lay

E Machining Allowance

F Roughness Value, Other than Ra

F’ Other Roughness - Minimum Value

Leader Tab

AMSURFSYM | 347
 Segment/Leader
Controls the addition or removal of leader segments.
Add Adds leader segments to a symbol.
Select object to attach:
Specify an object to attach the leader to
Start Point: Specify a start point
Next Point: Specify an endpoint
New leader segment was added.
Remove Removes leader segments from a symbol.
Select leader node or leader segment:
Specify a segment to remove
Leader segment was deleted.
Arrowhead
Displays a palette of arrowhead styles from which to choose.

Symbol on the Leader

Readjusts the position of the symbol on the leader.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Surface Texture dialog box to
open the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the symbol
properties for the current standard. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Surface Texture Symbols

When making changes to surface texture symbols, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a surface texture symbol with the geometry

it is attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a surface texture symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it
back into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a surface texture symbol into other applications imports it as a
.wmf, .dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a surface texture symbol, the symbol and leader become
unassociated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using
AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT.

348 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSWEEP
Creates a solid feature from a profile moved along a path

Use AMSWEEP to create a solid feature defined by a planar cross section swept
along a 2D or 3D path. Before you use AMSWEEP, you need a path and a
profile from which to create the swept feature. The profile sketch plane is
dependent on the path sketch plane. See “AM2DPATH” on page 18 and
“AM3DPATH” on page 20.

2D sweep 3D sweep

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Sweep.
Toolbutton Sweep
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Sketched Features ➤ Sweep
Command AMSWEEP

Select profile (sweep cross section): Specify a cross section

Sweep Dialog Box

AMSWEEP | 349
 Operation
Specifies the type of Boolean operation to perform.
Base
Creates a base feature.
Cut
Cuts the sweep feature from the base feature.
Join
Joins the sweep feature to the base feature.
Intersect
Creates a new feature defined by the intersection between the sweep feature
and the base feature.
Split
Uses the sweep feature to split the base feature.

Body Type
Specifies how the sweep is performed.
Normal
Sweeps the feature normal to the path.
Parallel
Sweeps the feature parallel to the path.

Termination
Specifies the type of termination for the sweep.
Path Only
Sweeps the profile along a path.
To Face
Sweeps the profile to a selected face.
From to
Sweeps a profile from one face to another.

Size
Specifies a draft angle to apply to the sweep feature.
Draft Angle
Uses this value to apply a draft angle to the sweep feature.

NOTE Some options are not available when you are creating a 3D sweep.

350 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMSWEEPSF
Creates a surface by sweeping cross sections along one or two rails

Use AMSWEEPSF to create a surface from one or more cross sections and one
or two rails (boundary curves). The cross sections are blended as they are
swept along the rails.

cross section swept along two rails

You can also sweep a single cross section, using an augmented line as a rail.
If you are using more than one rail, the augmented line must be the first rail
selected. AMSWEEPSF associates the cross section with the direction of vectors
on the augmented line, as it sweeps the cross section along the rail.
The new surface maintains the characteristics of the vectors by positioning
the cross sections relative to the augmented line vectors.

cross section swept along an augmented line

Valid wires for AMSWEEPSF are lines, arcs, splines, polylines, circles, ellipses,
surface wires, and an augmented line.
Toolbutton Swept Surface
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Sweep
Command AMSWEEPSF

Select cross sections: Select a wire

Select cross sections: Select another wire or press ENTER
Select rails: Select a wire
Select rails: Select another wire or press ENTER

AMSWEEPSF | 351
 Sweep Surface Dialog Box

Orientation
Defines the relationship of one or more cross sections to the rail as either
Normal, Parallel, or Direction. These options are available only when a single
rail is selected. The rail cannot be an augmented line.
Normal
Holds the selected cross sections perpendicular to the rail as the cross section
is swept along the rail.
Parallel
Holds the selected cross sections parallel to the rail as the cross section is
swept along the rail.
Direction
Specifies the orientation for the sweep.
Direction: Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z/<Start point>:
Choose an option, or specify a start point

Start Point Defines the direction using two points.

End point: Specify a second point
Viewdir Defines the direction using the current view.
Wire Defines the direction from a selected wire.
Select wire: Select a wire
X/Y/Z Defines the direction using the X, Y, or Z axis of the
current UCS.

Transition
Fits the cross section uniformly between two rails by either stretching or scal-
ing the surface as the distance between the rails fluctuates. This option is not
available if only one rail is selected.

352 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Scale
Extends or shrinks the entire cross section uniformly, according to the distance
between the rail curves.
Stretch
Extends or shrinks the entire cross section only in the direction across the
rails.

Direction
Holds the cross sections perpendicular to the rail as the cross section is swept
along the rail. Unlike the Normal option, the Direction option uses the
reference vector to prevent the cross section from twisting as it is swept along
the rail. Choosing the Direction option temporarily closes the Sweep Surface
dialog box and displays the vector prompt for holding the selected cross
section parallel to the orientation you specify.

NOTE By default, AMSWEEPSF creates a C2 surface. You can override the

default by changing AMPFITLEN and AMPFITANG or by imposing a second-order
spline on the cross section, using the Order option of AMFITSPLINE.

AMSYMLEADER
Adds or removes leaders from existing symbols

Use AMSYMLEADER to attach or remove a leader from an existing symbol.

Command AMSYMLEADER

Enter an option [Add/Remove] <Add>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Add
Adds a leader to an existing symbol.
Select symbol to add leader: Specify a symbol
Select object to attach: Specify an object to attach leader
Start point: Specify a start point
Next point: Specify a second point or press ENTER

Remove
Removes a leader from an existing symbol.
Select leader node or leader segment: Specify a leader

AMSYMLEADER | 353
AMSYMSTD
Edits and defines drafting standards for symbols

Use AMSYMSTD to specify the drafting standard to apply to the symbols you
create in the current drawing. You can define your own standard by changing
a base International Standard.
Browser In the Drawing tab, right-click a Layout icon and choose
Symbol/BOM Standards.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤
Symbol/BOM Standards.
Toolbutton Symbol/BOM Standards
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Symbol/BOM Standards
Command AMSYMSTD

Symbol Standards Dialog Box

The Symbol Standards dialog box controls the symbol standards defined in
your drawing. A list shows the available standards. An open-book symbol
preceding a standard indicates that it is the current standard.
Double-click a standard to make it the current standard. Click the plus sign in
front of a standard to expand it. Click the plus sign in front of the standard’s
categories to expand them. To access the symbol standard properties, right-
click a standard or any of its categories, and choose Properties from the menu.

354 | Chapter 1 Commands

The following dialog boxes control symbol properties:

■ The Standard Properties dialog box controls overall symbol properties.

■ Surface Texture Properties determines the availability of surface texture
options.
■ Feature Control Frame Properties controls merging, end padding, geometric
dimensioning, and tolerancing.
■ Welding Properties determines the availability of welding symbol
attributes.
■ Datum Target Properties sets attributes such as linetypes, hatch size, and
target point color.
■ BOM Properties sets information such as column, caption, width, data
type, size, precision, equivalents, caption alignment, and data alignment
for a BOM spreadsheet.
■ Balloon Properties sets attributes such as balloon style, arrow type, text
height, color, and the columns to be displayed.
■ Parts List Properties sets attributes such as insert heading, text color and
height, frame color, row gap, lines of text, output direction, wrap text, and
the columns to be displayed.

NOTE The current drafting standard determines the contents of the symbol
properties dialog boxes. All options may not be available.

Standard Properties Dialog Box

The dialog box opens with settings that are specific to the current International
Drafting Standard.

AMSYMSTD | 355
 Symbol
Specifies the overall scale factor and color to use for the symbol.

Text
Controls the text style, height, and color used by text added to the symbol.

Leader
Controls the arrowhead style, size, and color for the symbol.

Modify
Provides access to dialog boxes used to change the properties for the surface
texture, feature control frame, welding, datum target, and BOM and Balloon
symbols.

Default
Sets all values back to the default defined by the current standard.

Surface Texture Properties Dialog Box

Revision
Displays the current standard.

Symbol
Sets the size of the Machining Prohibited designation.

356 | Chapter 1 Commands

All Round
Sets the all round designation on symbols.

Multiline
Sets the use of multiline symbols.

Force Tail
Forces a tail on the symbol.

The Direction of Machining Lay

Controls machining lay specifications.

Feature Control Frame Properties Dialog Box

Revision
Displays the current standard.

Merge
Sets the following merging options:

■ Removes duplication of tolerance types with the same data.

■ Removes duplication of tolerance zones with the same data.
■ Removes duplication of merge datum references with the same data.

End Padding
Sets spacing to align all similar zones.

AMSYMSTD | 357
 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing
Sets the types of available symbols.
Show Symbols for
Sets the symbols to be displayed. Select a type from the list, and select the
control symbols in the window. Available types are

■ Geometric Characteristic
■ Material Removal Modifier

Style
Sets the text style for symbols.

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Welding Properties Dialog Box

Revision
Displays the current standard.

Identification Line
Sets the linetype to use for identification lines.

Gap
Sets the gap distance between the identification line and the reference line.

358 | Chapter 1 Commands

Weld Symbols
Specifies the weld symbols to use.
Show Symbols for
Sets the symbols to be displayed. Select a type from the list, and select the
control symbols in the window. Available types are

■ Weld Symbols
■ Contour Symbols
■ Backing Symbols

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Datum Target Properties Dialog Box

Revision
Displays the current standard.

Target Point
Sets the size and color of the target point.

Area Hatch
Sets the distance between hatch lines and the hatch angle.

Draw Arrowheads
Specifies whether arrowheads are drawn when the symbol is created.

AMSYMSTD | 359
 Hidden Leader Linetype
Specifies the linetype to use for hidden leaders.

Boundary Linetype
Specifies the linetype to use for the datum target boundary.

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

BOM Properties Dialog Box

Revision
Displays the current standard.

Column
Lists the columns defined in the Bill of Material database. Column names in
red cannot be modified, as they are used internally by AMBOM. To modify
other column names, double-click in the field and enter a new value.

Caption
Lists the caption used by AMBOM for each column when a parts list is created.
To modify a caption, double-click in the field, and enter a new value.

360 | Chapter 1 Commands

Width
Lists the width of each column used by AMBOM when a parts list is created.
To modify a width, double-click in the field, and enter a new value.

Equivalents
Lists the equivalent variable names for columns. Double-click to edit.

Data Type
Specifies the data type for the selected column. Data types are text, integer,
and real.

Size
Sets the maximum character size of the data in the selected column.

Precision
Sets the precision of the data in the selected column. Available only if the
data type is real.

Caption Alignment
Specifies the alignment for the caption in each column of the parts list.

Data Alignment
Specifies the alignment for the data in each column of the parts list.

Modify
Provides access to the Balloon Properties and Standard Properties dialog
boxes.

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

AMSYMSTD | 361
 Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Standard Balloon
Controls the type of balloon to use. Available types are

■ Circular
■ Open
■ Polygon
■ Circular 2 Text
■ Linear

362 | Chapter 1 Commands

Text Height
Sets the text height for the balloon text.
Color
Sets the color of the balloon.

Use Custom Block

Uses a user-defined block as the balloon type.
Leader to Center of User Block
Specifies that the leader is attached to the center of the user-defined block.
Leader to Extents of User Block
Specifies that the leader is attached to the extents of the user-defined block.

Arrow Type
Sets the type of arrow for the balloon leader.

Use Auxiliary Arrow Type

Sets the type of arrow for auxiliary leaders.

Columns to Display
Determines the information that will display in the balloon.

Default
Resets values to the default values.

Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating balloons.

Properties for ISO Dialog Box

The Properties for ISO dialog box controls the Parts List settings. It contains
two tabs, Standard and Custom Blocks.

AMSYMSTD | 363
 Standard Tab

Parts List Heading

Controls the settings for the parts list headings.
Insert Heading Controls whether a heading is applied to the parts list
and how it is formatted. You can place the heading at the
top or bottom of the parts list.
Heading Gap Controls the size of the gap between the parts list and the
heading.
Text Color Controls the color of the heading text.
Text Height Controls the height of the heading text.
Title Controls whether or not a title is used.
Attach Point
Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing.
Frame Color
Controls the color of the parts list frame.
Row Gap
Controls the spacing between rows.
Line Spacing
Controls the spacing between lines in a row.

364 | Chapter 1 Commands

Wrap Text
Controls whether the text is wrapped to fit in the columns of the parts list.
Printer Setup
Opens the Print Setup dialog box.
Columns to Display
Determines which columns are displayed in the parts list.
Default
Resets all values to default values.
Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Custom Blocks Tab

Use Custom Block for Parts List

Specifies whether a custom block is used for a parts list.
Block Name Scheme
Specifies the name of the custom block to use.
Parts List Heading
Controls whether a parts list heading is used in the custom block.
Attach Point
Controls the location of the point used to attach the parts list to the drawing.

AMSYMSTD | 365
 Filter Empty References
Filters references that are not attached to a part from the parts list.
Evaluate dsk-File
Reads a specified data file containing custom block information.
Apply
Applies the settings to use when creating parts lists.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Margins
Sets values for the printer margins, and specifies whether the parts list is
centered on the page.

Print
Specifies whether captions and headings are printed.

Fonts Tab
Controls the fonts to use for the title, heading, and body of the parts list.

Line Tab
Controls the line thicknesses to use in the parts list.

Printer
Opens the Windows Print Setup dialog box.

366 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Preview
Opens the Preview dialog box.

Default
Returns all values to the default values for the current standard.

Preview Dialog Box

Previous
Displays the previous parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Next
Displays the next parts list, if more than one exists in the current drawing.

Close
Closes the dialog box.

AMTEMPLATE
Creates, renames, and edits templates for hole notes

Use AMTEMPLATE to create, edit, delete, and rename hole templates. Modified
templates can be saved. Text can be imported from a separate file.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Annotation
➤ Hole Note Template.
Toolbutton Hole Note Template
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Annotation ➤ Hole Note Template
Command AMTEMPLATE

AMTEMPLATE | 367
 Hole Templates Dialog Box

Templates
Lists all currently defined hole note templates. Select the hole note template
you want to use.

Name
Specifies the name of the current template. To create a new template from an
existing one, enter a new name and choose Save.

Save
Saves any modifications to the current template or saves a selected template
to the specified name.

Delete
Deletes the selected template. Standard templates cannot be deleted.

Rename
Renames the current template. Standard templates cannot be renamed.

Edit Template
Opens the Multiline Text Editor dialog box containing the settings for the
current template. Change these values as needed. For more information
about using the Multiline Text Editor, see the AutoCAD User’s Guide.

368 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMTOLCONDITION
Controls tolerances used by parametric dimensions

Use AMTOLCONDITION in Drawing mode to control tolerances used by para-

metric dimensions. With AMTOLCONDITION, you can control which toler-
ances are used to calculate the size of a part. The part and its dimensions are
updated in your drawing views.
Context Menu Toleranced Model Edit
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Toleranced Model Edit
Command AMTOLCONDITION

Transformation of Model Dialog Box

Nominal Size
Calculates the part, using the nominal values of its dimensions.

Real Size
Calculates the part, using the real values of the dimensions.
Dimensions with Control for Each Tolerance
Opens the Manual Control of Dimension dialog box, where you can control
each tolerance value of the part’s dimensions.
Dimensions to Middle of Tolerance Field
Uses the middle of the tolerance field to calculate the part’s dimensions.

Manual Selection of Dimensions

Controls each tolerance value of selected dimensions, using the Manual
Control of Dimension dialog box.
Select dimensions: Specify a dimension
Select dimensions: Specify another dimension or press ENTER

AMTOLCONDITION | 369
 Manual Control of Dimension Dialog Box

Minimum
Uses the lower tolerance value.

Middle
Uses the average of the tolerance values.

Maximum
Uses the upper tolerance value.

Manual
Uses the value you specify in the adjacent field.

AMTRAIL
Adds an explosion path to an assembly scene

Use AMTRAIL to create trails from tweaked or exploded parts in scenes. AMTRAIL
is parametric and is updated automatically to reflect changes in the model.

unexploded scene exploded scene with trails added

370 | Chapter 1 Commands

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon,
and choose New Trail.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Trail.
Toolbutton New Trail
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ New Trail
Command AMTRAIL

Select reference point on part/subassembly: Specify a point

Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER

If you use the Browser method, these prompts do not appear.

Trail Offsets Dialog Box

Offset at Current Position

Controls whether a trail overshoots or undershoots the part and by how much,
at its tweaked position. You can also specify the distance, by picking points on
screen.

Offset at Assembled Position

Controls whether a trail overshoots or undershoots the reference part and by
how much, at its assembled position. You can also specify the distance, by
picking points on screen.

AMTRAIL | 371
AMTUBE
Creates a tubular surface around a selected wire that becomes the axis of the tube

Use AMTUBE to create tubular surfaces. AMTUBE constructs a surface around a

wire that represents the axis of the tube. If a line is selected, AMTUBE creates
one cylindrical surface; it creates a cylindrical surface at each segment around
a 2D polyline and toroidal surfaces at each vertex. If a spline is selected, the
tube blends with the curvature of the spline. AMTUBE creates only rational
surfaces.

line 2D spline

2D polyline

tubes created using different wires 3D spline

Toolbutton Tubular Surface

Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Create Surface ➤ Tubular
Command AMTUBE

Select wire: Select a wire

Tube diameter <1.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

If a 2D polyline is selected, the following prompt is displayed:

Enter an option [Automatic/Manual] <Manual>: Choose an option

Automatic
Creates the bends using the same radius as specified for the tube.

Manual
Allows you to specify the radius at each bend.
Enter bend radius at point <1.0000>: Specify a value or press ENTER

372 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMTWEAK
Adjusts the position of a part or subassembly in an exploded assembly scene

Use AMTWEAK to position a part or subassembly in an exploded scene. Each

tweak is incremental to the last position of the part or subassembly.
The root part of an assembly or a subassembly cannot be tweaked. Its position
remains fixed.

before AMTWEAK after AMTWEAK

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon,

and choose New Tweak.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose New Tweak.
Toolbutton New Tweak
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ New Tweak
Command AMTWEAK

Select part/subassembly to tweak: Select a part or subassembly

Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER

If you use the Browser method, these prompts do not appear.

Tweak Part/Subassembly Dialog Box

AMTWEAK | 373
 Move
Moves the part or subassembly along a line in the direction of the arrow
displayed on the selected reference geometry. Enter a negative value to move
the geometry in the opposite direction.
Select reference geometry: Select a part
Enter distance <0.0000>: Specify a value

Rotate
Rotates the part or subassembly about the axis of the reference geometry.
Select reference geometry: Select a part
Enter angle of rotation <0>: Specify a value

Transform
Applies a 3D transformation to the part or subassembly, using distances and
angles to precisely position the part of subassembly in 3D space.
Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] <Move>: Choose an option or press ENTER

Move
Begins the transformation by specifying a distance to move the part or
subassembly.
Define direction and length.
Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option or specify a point

Start Point Defines the direction using two points.

Specify end point: Specify a second point
Viewdir Defines the direction using the current view.
Wire Defines the direction from a selected wire.
Select wire to define direction: Select a wire
X/Y/Z Defines the direction using the X, Y, or Z axis of the
current UCS.
Enter length <1.0000>: Specify a value
Enter an option [Accept/Flip] <Accept>:
Enter f or press ENTER
Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] <Move>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

374 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Rotate
Begins the transformation by specifying a rotation for the selected part or
subassembly about a specified point in a specified direction.
Specify center of rotation: Specify a point
Define direction.
Specify start point or [Viewdir/Wire/X/Y/Z]: Choose an option or specify a point
Enter angle of rotation <0>: Specify a value
Enter an option [eXit/Move/Rotate] <Rotate>: Choose an option or press ENTER

NOTE For more information about creating 3D transformations, see the

AutoCAD User’s Guide.

AMUCSFACE
Aligns the UCS with a selected face

Use AMUCSFACE to align the current UCS with a selected face.

Toolbutton UCS on Face
Command AMUCSFACE

Select planar face: Specify a face

Enter an option [Accept/Next] <Accept>: Choose an option or press ENTER

AMUCSPERP
Creates a UCS perpendicular to a line

Use AMUCSPERP to create a UCS perpendicular to a selected line. You have the
option of creating a sketch plane on the new UCS.
Toolbutton UCS Perpendicular
Command AMUCSPERP

Select entity: Specify a line

Create Sketch plane to current UCS? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Choose an option or press ENTER

AMUCSFACE | 375
AMUNSPLINE
Converts a spline to an angular or smooth polyline

Use AMUNSPLINE to break down splines into approximations or interpolation

points (fit points) or to convert splines directly into polylines that are fit to
a specific tolerance.
AMUNSPLINE creates smooth polylines for various applications, such as
producing input for CAM (computer-aided manufacturing) equipment that
doesn’t accept splines. A method called presplining is used. Presplining
converts a polyline to a spline and then back to a polyline. The conversion and
reconversion smooths the polyline without the polyline losing its character.
To prespline a polyline, enter raw, digitized 3D data in the form of a polyline
through an Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) translator, or create
polylines in your current drawing. Next, convert the polyline to a spline using
a loose tolerance. Finally, use AMUNSPLINE to reconvert the spline into a
smooth version of the original polyline.

NOTE The conversion option isn’t displayed if the original fit points have been
lost. Editing with AutoCAD grips destroys the original fit points of a spline.

Toolbutton Unspline
Desktop Menu Surface ➤ Edit Wireframe ➤ Unspline
Command AMUNSPLINE

Select splines: Select a spline

Select splines: Select another spline or press ENTER
Enter tolerance or [Original fit points] <0.0010>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

Tolerance
Specifies the tolerance to use when converting the spline. The smaller the tol-
erance, the more closely the smooth polyline will follow the path of the spline.

Original Fit Points

Converts the spline to its original interpolation or fit points. This option
creates an unsmoothed polyline passing through each fit point of the spline.
This option is not available if the original fit points have been lost.

376 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT
Unsuppresses suppressed part features

Use AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT to unsuppress features that have been suppressed

manually. You cannot use this command to unsuppress table driven
(versioned) suppressed features.
Unsuppressing manually suppressed features from the Browser does not
require selection. Simply right-click the icon and choose Unsuppress.
If you unsuppress features from the command line, menu, or toolbar, you
must specify the feature, as it cannot be selected during the command
process. Alternately, you can use AMREPLAY to manually unsuppress individ-
ual features.
Browser Right-click a suppressed feature and choose Unsuppress.
Context Menu Right-click the graphics area and choose Edit Features ➤
Unsuppress, or Edit Features ➤ Unsuppress by Type.
Toolbutton Unsuppress Features
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Unsuppress Feature, or
Part ➤ Feature Suppression ➤ Unsuppress by Type
Command AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT

Enter an option [By type/All] <All>: Choose an option, or press ENTER

By Type
Unsuppresses features by type. Opens the Unsuppress by Type dialog box.

All
Unsuppresses all suppressed features for the active part, all parts, or a selected
part.
Enter an option [Active part/aLl parts/select Part] <select Part>:
Choose an option, or press ENTER to continue

Select Part
Unsuppresses features for a selected part.
Active Part
Unsuppresses all suppressed features on the active part.
All Parts
Unsuppresses all suppressed features in your drawing.

AMUNSUPPRESSFEAT | 377
 Unsuppress by Type Dialog Box

Active Part
Unsuppresses specified features on the active part only.

All Local Parts

Unsuppresses specified features on all local parts.

All Except Base Feature

Unsuppresses all features except the base feature on either the active part or
all local parts.

Placed Features
Unsuppresses all placed features of the specified type(s).

Sketched Features
Unsuppresses all sketched features of the specified type(s).

Work Features
Unsuppresses all work features of the specified type(s).

378 | Chapter 1 Commands

AMUPDATE
Regenerates the active part, assembly, scene, or drawing view to reflect new dimensions,
constraints, and changes to existing features

Use AMUPDATE to update parts, links, assemblies, scenes, and drawing views
after changes have been made to features, constraints, or dimensions.
AMUPDATE recalculates the model to reflect the modifications.

Update Part
Browser Click the Update Part icon.
Toolbutton Update Part
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Update Part
Command AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] <active Part>:

Press ENTER

Update Links
Command AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] <active Part>: Enter k

Variables have been updated for all local parts.

Update Assembly
Browser Click the Update Assembly icon.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update
Assembly.
Toolbutton Update Assembly
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Update Assembly
Command AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/Assembly/aLl parts/linKs] <active Part>: Enter a

AMUPDATE | 379
 Update Scene
Browser Click the Update Scene icon.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update
Scene.
Toolbutton Update Scene
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Update Scene
Command AMUPDATE

Enter an option [Assembly/Part/Scene] <Part>: Enter s

Enter scene name to activate or [?] <SCENE1>:
Specify a scene, choose ? for a list, or press ENTER

Update Drawing View

Browser Click the Update View icon.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Update View.
Toolbutton Update View
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Update View
Command AMUPDATE

Enter an option [active Part/View/aLl parts] <active Part>: Enter v

The option to update the current layout will update all views that are on it.
Select view to update [All layouts/current Layout]:
Choose an option or select a view

AMVARS
Creates and manages active part and global design variables and provides table driven
parts by linking to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets

Use AMVARS to control the use of global and active part design variables. You
use design variables to create parametric equations for the dimensions
controlling your features and parts. You also use them in an external spread-
sheet to control table driven parts.
With AMVARS you can perform a full search and replace when renaming or delet-
ing active part and global design variables, automatically update a linked .prm
or Excel spreadsheet file when saving the drawing file, and move active part
design variables to global design variables to use in more than one part. You can
also specify feature suppression in an external spreadsheet for table driven parts.

380 | Chapter 1 Commands

Browser In the Model tab, right-click a part icon and choose
Design Variables.
Toolbutton Design Variables
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Design Variables
Command AMVARS

Design Variables Dialog Box

The Design Variables dialog box contains two tabs, Active Part and Global.

Active Part Tab

Provides settings to create and control active part design variables.

New
Creates a new active part design variable.
Delete
Deletes a selected active part design variable.
Purge
Deletes all unused active part design variables.
Table Driven (T)
Provides options for setup and control of table driven parts.
Active Version Selects which version of a table driven part is active.
Setup Opens the Table Driven Setup dialog box.

AMVARS | 381
 Move to Global
Provides options for moving active part design variables to global design
variables.
Selected Moves highlighted active part design variables to global
design variables.
Referenced Moves referenced active part design variables to global
design variables.
All Moves all active part design variables to global design
variables.
Table Driven File Name
Displays the name of the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet driving the active part.
When you create design variables that will be assigned to a spreadsheet, to
externally drive versions of a part, set up the table from the Design Variables
dialog box.

Global Variables Tab

Provides settings to create and control global design variables.

The Global Variables tab contains options for controlling global design vari-
ables. These options are identical to the Active Part tab, with the following
exceptions.

382 | Chapter 1 Commands

Global Variable File (.prm)
Controls external parameter files.
Import Imports an external parameter file.
Link Links an external parameter file to the current drawing.
Export Exports global design variables to an external parameter
file.
Unlink Unlinks a linked parameter file.
Copy to Active Part
Copies specified design variables to the active part.
Selected Copies highlighted global design variables to active part
design variables.
Referenced Copies referenced global design variables to active part
design variables.
All Copies all global design variables to active part design
variables.

Table Driven Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box controls the external spreadsheets used to drive part versions
in your drawing.

Active Part Tab

Contains settings to create and control external spreadsheets using Active
Part design variables.

AMVARS | 383
 Layout
Controls how the spreadsheet will be laid out, which cell to use as the start
cell, its orientation, and name.
Active Version
Controls which version in the table is active in the drawing.
Type
Controls the type of information to use when the spreadsheet is generated.
Variables Uses design variables to create the table.
Feature Uses currently suppressed features to create the table. If
Suppression no features are suppressed, all features are added by
default.
Both Uses both variables and currently suppressed features to
create the table.
Format
Controls the format of the spreadsheet.
Concatenate Creates one table containing both variables and
Tables suppressed features.
Separate Tables Creates a separate table for variables and suppressed
features.

Global Variables Tab

Contains settings to create and control external spreadsheets using global
design variables.

384 | Chapter 1 Commands

 The Global Variables tab contains the same controls as the Active Part tab,
except that Type and Format are not available.
Both tabs contain the following options.
Create
Creates a new spreadsheet file.
Link
Links an existing spreadsheet file to the drawing.
Append
Appends new information to an existing spreadsheet file.
Edit
Edits an existing spreadsheet file.
Update Link
Updates the link to an existing spreadsheet file.
Unlink
Unlinks an existing spreadsheet file from the drawing.

AMVIEW
Controls viewing in Model mode

Use AMVIEW to rotate view orientation, fit visible geometry to the screen, and
set the view to a plan view of the current sketch. The coordinate system is
established irrespective of the viewpoint location. The option you select
remains in effect until you choose another.
Command AMVIEW

Enter an option [Angle/Down/eXit/Left/Right/Sketch/Up] <fit>:

Choose an option or press ENTER

Angle
Specifies the angle to rotate a view.
Specify rotation angle <15>: Specify a value

AMVIEW | 385
 Down
Rotates the view downward, in increments specified by Angle.

Exit
Exits the command.

Fit
Fits the view to the current viewport and exits the command.

Left
Rotates the view to the left, in increments specified by Angle.

Right
Rotates the view to the right, in increments specified by Angle.

Sketch
Displays a plan view of the current sketch and exits the command.

Up
Rotates the view upward, in increments specified by Angle.

AMVIEWOUT
Converts Mechanical Desktop drawing views to AutoCAD 2D data

Use AMVIEWOUT to convert views created in Drawing mode into 2D AutoCAD

data and to write them to a new drawing file. Only views created with the
command AMDWGVIEW are converted. After conversion, all objects in the file
are AutoCAD 2D objects and can be manipulated with AutoCAD commands.
You can select which views to convert.
Browser Right-click a view icon and choose Export View.
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Export View
Command AMVIEWOUT

386 | Chapter 1 Commands

 Export Drawing Views to AutoCAD Dialog Box

Select a file name in the dialog box and choose Save.

n drawing views found.
Select objects, or <ret> for all: Select a view or press ENTER
Select objects: Select another view or press ENTER

AMVISIBLE
Controls the visibility of work features, parts, assemblies, scenes, drawings, and geometric
objects

Use AMVISIBLE to control the visibility of work features, parts and subassem-
blies, DOF and COG symbols, individual geometry, balloons, parts lists, refer-
ence and parametric dimensions, and drawing view edges.

Controlling Part Visibility

Browser Click the Visible icon.
Toolbutton Part Visibility
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Part Visibility
Command AMVISIBLE

AMVISIBLE | 387
 Controlling Assembly Visibility
Browser Click the Visible icon.
Toolbutton Assembly Visibility
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly Visibility
Command AMVISIBLE

Controlling Scene Visibility

Browser Click the Visible icon.
Toolbutton Scene Visibility
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Scene Visibility
Command AMVISIBLE

Controlling Drawing Visibility

Browser Click the Visible icon.
Toolbutton Drawing Visibility
Desktop Menu Drawing ➤ Drawing Visibility
Command AMVISIBLE

Desktop Visibility Dialog Box

The Desktop Visibility dialog box contains three tabs: Part, Assembly, and
Objects.

388 | Chapter 1 Commands

Part Tab

Hide
Hides specified objects.
Unhide
Unhides specified objects.
Objects
Controls the visibility of work features and cut lines.
Select
Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting
them on screen.
Except
If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them
on screen.

AMVISIBLE | 389
 Assembly Tab

Hide
Hides specified objects.
Unhide
Unhides specified objects.
Objects
Controls the visibility of work features, parts, subassemblies, and COG and
DOF symbols.

Work Objects
Controls the visibility of work features.
Select
Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting
them on screen.
Except
If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them
on screen.

390 | Chapter 1 Commands

Objects Tab

Hide
Hides specified objects.
Unhide
Unhides specified objects.
Objects
Controls the visibility of geometry.
Properties
Controls the visibility of objects of a specific color, linetype, or layer.
Select
Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting
them on screen.
Except
If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them
on screen.

AMVISIBLE | 391
 Scene Tab

Hide
Hides specified objects.
Unhide
Unhides specified objects.
Objects
Controls the visibility of parts, subassemblies, and trails.
Select
Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting
them on screen.
Except
If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them
on screen.

392 | Chapter 1 Commands

Drawing Tab

Hide
Hides specified objects.
Unhide
Unhides specified objects.
Objects
Controls the visibility of balloons, parts lists, parametric and reference
dimensions, and viewport edges.
Select
Choose this option to specify which objects to hide or unhide by selecting
them on screen.
Except
If you select All, this option allows you to exclude objects by selecting them
on screen.

AMVISIBLE | 393
AMVRMLOUT
Converts selected objects to VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) to be viewed on
a Web page

Use AMVRMLOUT to export selected objects to Virtual Reality Modeling

Language so that they can be displayed on Web pages.
Desktop Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Desktop VRML
Command AMVRMLOUT

Select objects: Select an object

Select objects: Select another object or press ENTER

The Save File dialog box is displayed. Specify a location and a name for the
file, and choose OK.

AMWELDSYM
Creates a welding symbol

Use AMWELDSYM to create welding symbols that conform to international

drafting standards. DXF group codes are assigned to welding symbols and
allow complete data exchange.

Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Symbols ➤

Welding.
Toolbutton Welding Symbol
Desktop Menu Annotate ➤ Symbols ➤ Welding
Command AMWELDSYM

394 | Chapter 1 Commands

Select object to attach: Specify an object
Start Point: Specify a start point for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify an endpoint for the leader
Next Point <Symbol>: Specify a point for another leader segment, or press ENTER

Weld Symbol Dialog Box

The Weld Symbol dialog box controls the settings for welding symbols. The
dialog box contains four tabs: General, Arrow Side, Other Side, and Leader.

General Tab

Orientation
Controls the location and orientation (left or right) of the welding symbol.
Stagger
Offsets dual fillet welds to indicate staggered welds. This option is available
only when fillet welds are applied to both sides of the symbol.
Symbol
Controls the number of reference lines added to the symbol.
Additional Controls
In the lower section of the General tab, you can add a tail, a field weld
symbol, an all round symbol, and notes for the weld symbol. You can also set
the symbols to use on either side of the arrow. Hold your cursor over an area,
and wait for the tooltip to be displayed for a description.

AMWELDSYM | 395
 Arrow Side Tab

The contents of this tab vary, depending on the type of weld you have
specified. Specify values for the fields that apply.

Other Side Tab

The contents of this tab vary, depending on the type of weld you have
specified. Specify values for the fields that apply.

396 | Chapter 1 Commands

Leader Tab

Segment/Leader
Controls the addition and removal of leader segments.
Arrowhead
Displays a palette of arrowhead styles.
Attach
Changes geometry association.

Standard Properties
Click the button in the lower-left corner of the Surface Texture dialog box to
access the Standard Properties dialog box, where you can control the symbol
properties for the current standard. See “AMSYMSTD” on page 354.

Modifying Welding Symbols

When making changes to welding symbols, consider the following:

■ To retain the associativity of a welding symbol with the geometry it is

attached to, use AMEDIT or AMPOWEREDIT to make changes.
■ If you copy a welding symbol to the Windows clipboard, pasting it back
into a drawing brings it in as a block.
■ Pasting a welding symbol into other applications imports it as a .wmf,
.dwg, or .bmp file.
■ If you explode a welding symbol, the symbol and leader become unasso-
ciated lines and text, and you can no longer edit them using AMEDIT or
AMPOWEREDIT.

AMWELDSYM | 397
AMWHEREUSED
Shows where a part or subassembly definition is used

Use AMWHEREUSED to display the location of a specified part or subassembly

definition.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Assembly ➤
Where Used.
Toolbutton Where Used
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Assembly ➤ Where Used
Command AMWHEREUSED

Part/Subassembly Locations Dialog Box

Parts/Subassemblies
Lists the parts and subassemblies in the current file. Select the definition you
want located.

Highlight
Specifies whether to highlight the specified instances.

List
Specifies whether or not to list the locations of the instances on the command
line.

398 | Chapter 1 Commands

 File Out
Writes the information to an external file.

File
Opens the Output File dialog box, where you specify a file name for the
external file.

AMWORKAXIS
Creates a work axis at the centerline of a cylindrical, conical, or toroidal surface

Use AMWORKAXIS to create a work axis. You can create a work axis by selecting
an existing circular edge or by sketching its position on the current sketch
plane. You can dimension or constrain new sketches to a work axis and create
a work plane through it, to use in sketch and feature creation.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Work Axis.
Toolbutton Work Axis
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Axis
Command AMWORKAXIS

Select cylinder, cone, torus or [Sketch]:

Choose an option or select a cylindrical edge

Sketch
Draws a two-point line on the current sketch plane.
Specify first point: Specify first point for axis
Specify second point: Specify second point for axis

AMWORKAXIS | 399
AMWORKPLN
Creates a work plane at a specified location

Use AMWORKPLN to define a parametric work plane with a combination of

modifiers selected from a dialog box. In most cases, you must select a modi-
fier from each column. After you have selected an option in one column,
inappropriate combinations are dimmed in the other column.
Four additional options create nonparametric work planes: UCS, World Xy,
World Yz, and World Xz.
After you select the modifiers to define the work plane, you specify geometry
to orient it. The Create Sketch Plane option is selected to orient the sketch
plane on the new work plane automatically. To override the default, clear the
check box.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Work Plane.
Toolbutton Work Plane
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Plane
Command AMWORKPLN

Work Plane Feature Dialog Box

400 | Chapter 1 Commands

1st Modifier
Controls the type of geometry to select for the first modifier.
On Edge/Axis
Creates a work plane on an existing part edge or work axis.
Select work axis, straight edge or [worldX/worldY/worldZ]:
Choose an option, or select a work axis or a part edge

WorldX Uses the X axis of the World Coordinate System (WCS) as

the first edge.
WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.
On Vertex
Creates a work plane at a selected vertex or datum point.
Select vertex or datum point: Select a vertex or a datum point

Tangent
Creates a work plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face.
Select cylindrical or conical face: Select a cylindrical or a conical face

Planar Parallel
Creates a work plane parallel to an existing work plane or planar face.
Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Select an existing work plane or planar face

WorldX Uses the X axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.
Planar Normal
Creates a work plane perpendicular to an existing work plane or planar face.
Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option, or select the edge of a work plane or planar face.

WorldX Uses the X axis of the WCS as the first edge.

WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the first edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the first edge.

AMWORKPLN | 401
 Normal to Start
Creates a work plane perpendicular to the start point of a sketched work axis,
a 2D path, or a 3D path. This option does not require a second modifier.
Select end point: Select a sketched work axis, a 2D path, or a 3D path

On UCS
Creates a work plane using the XY plane of the current UCS. This option does
not require a second modifier.
On World XY
Creates a work plane using the XY plane of the WCS. This option does not
require a second modifier.
On World YZ
Creates a work plane using the YZ plane of the WCS. This option does not
require a second modifier.
On World XZ
Creates a work plane using the XZ plane of the WCS. This option does not
require a second modifier.

2nd Modifier
Controls the type of geometry to select for the second modifier.
On Edge/Axis
Creates a work plane on an existing part edge or work axis.
Select work axis, straight edge or [worldX/worldY/worldZ]:
Choose an option, or select a work axis or a part edge

WorldX Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.
On Vertex
Creates a work plane at a selected vertex.
Select vertex: Select a vertex

Tangent
Creates a work plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face.
Select cylindrical or conical face: Select a cylindrical or a conical face

402 | Chapter 1 Commands

Planar Parallel
Creates a work plane parallel to an existing work plane or planar face.
Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Select an existing work plane or planar face

WorldX Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.
Planar Normal
Creates a work plane perpendicular to an existing work plane or planar face.
Select work plane, planar face or [worldXy/worldYz/worldZx/Ucs]:
Choose an option, or select the edge of a work plane or planar face.

WorldX Uses the X axis of the WCS as the second edge.

WorldY Uses the Y axis of the WCS as the second edge.
WorldZ Uses the Z axis of the WCS as the second edge.
Planar Angle
Creates a work plane at a specified angle from an existing work plane or
planar face.
On 3 Vertices
Creates a work plane defined by three vertices.
Select vertex: Select first vertex
Select vertex: Select second vertex
Select vertex: Select third vertex

Offset
Creates a work plane offset a specified distance from a selected work plane or
planar face.
Angle
Creates a work plane at a specified angle from a selected work plane or planar
face.

Create Sketch Plane

Specifies whether a sketch plane is created on the work plane.

AMWORKPLN | 403
AMWORKPT
Creates work points on the active sketch plane

Use AMWORKPT to create work point features on the active sketch plane.
Work points are useful for placing holes in parts, for serving as the center of
a polar array, and as a parametric point for constraining surfaces.
To create a work point, create a sketch plane and place the work point; then
dimension and constrain the work point. Points appear as three perpendicular
lines originating from the point center.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Sketched &
Work Features ➤ Work Point.
Toolbutton Work Point
Desktop Menu Part ➤ Work Features ➤ Work Point
Command AMWORKPT

Workpoint will be placed on the current sketch plane.

Specify the location of the workpoint: Specify a location

AMXFACTOR
Controls the explosion factor for scenes

Use AMXFACTOR to specify an overall explosion factor for a scene or to apply

specific explosion factors to parts in an assembly.

Setting a Scene Explosion Factor

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a scene icon and choose
Explode Factor.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Scene
Explosion Factor.
Toolbutton Scene Explosion Factor
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Scene Explosion Factor
Command AMXFACTOR

404 | Chapter 1 Commands

Select part or subassembly or [sCene]: Enter c
Enter scene name to change or [?] <SCENE1>:
Enter ? for a list, specify a name, or press ENTER
Enter new explosion factor for "SCENE1" or [Reset] <0.0000>:
Specify a value, choose an option, or press ENTER

If you choose the Browser method, the first prompt is not displayed.

Setting a Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor

Browser In the Scene tab, right-click a part or subassembly icon
and choose Explode Factor.
Context Menu In the graphics area, right-click and choose Part
Explosion Factor.
Toolbutton Part or Subassembly Explosion Factor
Desktop Menu Assembly ➤ Exploded Views ➤ Part Explosion Factor
Command AMXFACTOR

Select part or subassembly [sCene]: Specify a part or subassembly

Enter new explosion factor for "PART1_1" [Reset] <0.0000>:
Choose an option, specify a value, or press ENTER

If you choose the Browser method, the first prompt is not displayed.

Reset
Resets the explosion factor to the default value.

Using the Browser to Set Explosion Factors

If you choose the Browser method to set explosion factors, the Explode Factor
dialog box appears. Specify a value in the dialog box.

Explode Factor Dialog Box

Explode Factor
Sets the explosion factor for the specified scene, part, or subassembly. The
value is the distance, in model units, by which the part(s) will be separated.

AMXFACTOR | 405
AMXREFCONVERT
Simplifies the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text styles, dimension styles, and
multiline styles that are imported with external references and remain after the
external references have been localized

Use AMXREFCONVERT to simplify the names of layers, blocks, linetypes, text

styles, dimension styles, and multiline styles that are imported with external
references and remain after the external references have been localized.
AMXREFCONVERT will attempt to strip the drawingname$0$ that is appended
to names when a drawing is externally referenced. Unreferenced symbols are
purged from the drawing.
Command AMXREFCONVERT

406 | Chapter 1 Commands

System Variables

In This Chapter
2
This chapter provides descriptions of Mechanical ■ Using system variables

Desktop® system variables in alphabetical order. System

variables contain the settings (or values) for the

Mechanical Desktop operating environment and for

some of its commands. Each system variable has an

associated type: integer, real, or text string. To examine

or change a value, type the variable name on the

command line.

407
System Variables

Variable Characteristic Description

ACISOUTVER Type: Integer Sets the value for exporting SAT file data to a specific
Initial value: 0 ACIS version.
Possible values:
0 - Version of ACIS currently in use
15 - ACIS 1.5
16 - ACIS 1.6
17 - ACIS 1.7
18 - ACIS 1.8
20 - ACIS 2.0
21 - ACIS 2.1
30 - ACIS 3.0
40 - ACIS 4.0
50 - ACIS 5.0

AMANNOTEPRESERVE Type: Integer Controls whether annotations that do not update are
Initial value: 1 deleted or saved to a group. Occasionally, dimensions
or other annotations, do not update correctly.
Possible values:
0 - Orphaned objects are deleted
1 - Orphaned objects are placed in an AutoCAD® group

AMAUTOASSEMBLE Type: Integer Solves each newly created constraint and updates the
Initial value: 1 assembly. If AMAUTOASSEMBLE is turned off, the
constraint is solved to check that it is valid, but the
assembly is not updated.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMAUTOCL Type: Integer Controls whether automatic centerlines are created at

Initial value: 0 view creation for the following features.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMAUTODIMARRANGE Type: Integer Controls the automatic arrangement of parametric

Initial value: 1 dimensions.
Possible values:
0 - Off (do not automatically arrange parametric
dimensions)
1 - On (automatically arrange parametric dimensions)

408 | Chapter 2 System Variables

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMAUTOLOCKSCN Type: Integer Controls whether scenes can be locked.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMBLENDTOL Type: Real Avoids the creation of CO breaks when surfaces and
Initial value: 0.0100 splines are joined in surface modeling.
Possible values:
[0.0001 to Inf]

AMCLCM Type: Real Controls the length of centerline annotations.

Initial value: 0.11
Possible values:
Any positive number

AMCLFEAT Type: Integer Controls whether automatic centerlines are generated

Initial value: 5 (circular and for which features.
extrusions and holes)
Possible values:
0 - No features
1 - Holes
2 - Fillets
4 - Circular extrusions
NOTE To obtain combinations of settings, simply add
the values. For example, to create centerlines for just
holes and fillets, set AMCLFEAT=3.

AMCLGAP Type: Real Controls gaps in centerline annotations.

Initial value: 0.156
Possible values:
Any positive number

AMCLOSHT Type: Real Controls the length of centerline overshoot beyond an

Initial value: 0.11 object.
Possible values:
Any positive number

AMCLPAR Type: Integer Controls whether the overshoot line length of a

Initial value: 1 centerline parametrically changes during updates.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

System Variables | 409

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMCLVIEW Type: Integer Defines which view types automatic centerlines should
Initial Value: 63 (all be generated for.
except ISO) Possible values:
0 - No views
1 - Base views
2 - Ortho views
4 - Auxiliary views
8 - Broken views
16 - Detail views
32 - Section views
64 - Isometric views
NOTE To obtain combinations of settings, simply add
the values. For example, to create centerlines for Ortho
and detail views, set AMCLVIEW=18.

AMCMDDIM Type: Integer Controls if dimensions can be selected when editing

Initial value: 1 sketches.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMCOMPSV Type: Integer Controls compressed save format for Mechanical

Initial value: 1 Desktop data within a file.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMCONDSPSZ Type: Integer Controls the height of displayed constraints in a sketch.

Initial value: 5
Possible values:
1 to 19

410 | Chapter 2 System Variables

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMDWGCOLOR Type: Integer Sets the color of part edges and hatch patterns in
Initial value: 0 drawing views. Controls whether hatch patterns, visible
edges, hidden edges, or all edge types use the color of
the model, or the color of the layer where they reside.
Possible values:
0 - Visible edge, hidden edge, and hatch colors come
from their layers.
1 - Visible edge color comes from the model; hidden
edge and hatch color come from their layers.
2 - Hidden edge color comes from the model; visible
edge and hatch color come from their layers.
3 - Visible and hidden edge colors come from the
model; hatch color comes from its layer.
4 - Hatch color comes from the model; visible and
hidden edge colors come from their layers.
5 - Visible edge and hatch colors come from the model;
hidden edge color comes from their layers.
6 - Hidden edge and hatch colors come from the
model; visible edge color comes from its layer.
7 - Visible edge, hidden edge, and hatch colors come
from the model.

AMEXTREFDIM Type: Integer Controls whether or not parametric dimensions on

Initial value: 0 external parts will be shown as reference dimensions.
Possible values:
0 - Do not display parametric dimensions on external
parts as reference dimensions
1 - Display parametric dimensions on external parts as
reference dimensions

AMGRPREFIX Type: String Specifies the prefix name for groups.

Initial value: ASG
Possible values:
Any 3 characters

AMHATCHISO Type: Integer Controls the automatic calculation of hatch patterns in

Initial value: 0 an ISO view.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On
2 - Hide obscured

AMHIDEZERODIM Type: Integer Hides the display of zero-length parametric dimensions.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Do not hide zero-length parametric dimensions
1 - Hide zero-length parametric dimensions

System Variables | 411

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMHLCALC Type: Integer Suppresses or activates hidden line calculations in

Initial value: 1 drawing views.
Possible values:
0- Hidden lines are not removed
1- Removes hidden lines with full occlusion
2- Removes hidden lines with no occlusion
3- Removes hidden lines with no occlusion on splines

AMINSERTABS Type: Integer Controls the insertion point of parts or subassemblies

Initial value: 0 inserted into the current file.
Possible values:
0 - Center of geometry
1 - Insertion point of external file

AMINTERPOLY Type: Integer Determines if a polyline is created at the intersection

Initial value: 0 between two surfaces.
Possible values:
0 - Polyline is not created
1 - Polyline is created

AMJOINGAP Type: Real Determines the gap tolerance between two endpoints
Initial value: 0.0100 of wires and surfaces in surface modeling.
Possible values:
[0.0001 to Inf]

AMLINETHICK Type: Real Sets the line thickness used in calculating thread
Initial value: .0275 mm annotation for ISO and DIN standards.
Possible values:
No limits

AMPAGELEN Type: Integer Controls the number of lines output to the text window
Initial value: 25 before pausing.
Possible values:
[0 to 1000]

AMPFITANG Type: Real Set the value for finding sharp corners in polylines. New
Initial value: 150 splines and surfaces created from polylines will be
broken at any angle less than this value.
Possible values:
[0 to 180] degrees

412 | Chapter 2 System Variables

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMPFITLEN Type: Real Sets the value for finding flat polyline segments. New
Initial value: Inf splines and surfaces created from polylines will lie
exactly flat against any polyline segment whose length
is greater than this value.
Possible values:
[0.0 to Inf]

AMPFITTOL Type: Real Controls the tolerance for fitting a spline to a polyline.
Initial value: 0.0100
Possible values:
[0.0001 to Inf]

AMPROJOUTPUT Type: Integer Controls the output created when a wire is projected
Initial value: 2 onto a surface.
Possible values:
0 - Creates an augmented line
1 - Creates a polyline
2 - Trims the surface

AMPROJTYPE Type: Integer Controls the drawing view projection method for
Initial value: 1 orthographic or ancillary views.
Possible values:
0 - Uses first angle projection
1 - Uses third angle projection

AMPSNAPCOORDO Type: Integer Controls the display of on-screen coordinates.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMREUSEDIM Type: Integer Toggles automatic display of parametric dimensions in

Initial value: 1 drawing views.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMRULEMODE Type: Integer Controls whether constraints are automatically applied.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off (constraint rules not applied)
1 - On (constraint rules applied)

System Variables | 413

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMSCENEUPDATE Type: Integer Controls automatic scene updates.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMSECLTYPE Type: String Sets the linetype for section lines in the parent view of a
Initial value: Phantom2 cross section.
Possible values:
Any valid AutoCAD linetype

AMSECTIONDIM Type: Integer Controls if parametric dimensions are placed in section

Initial value: 0 views. May also be set as an option in AMOPTIONS.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMSELDYNAMIC Type: Integer Controls the dynamic highlighting of all selectable

Initial value: 1 entities.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMSELTIPS Type: Integer Controls the dynamic display of help tips.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMSFDISPMODE Type: String Controls the linetype of the surface display lines.
Initial value: On
Possible values:
On - Use ASULTYPE and ASVLTYPE
Off - Use surface’s default linetype

AMSFTOL Type: Real Controls the surface accuracy tolerance.

Initial value: 0.001
Possible values:
[0.0001 to Inf]

414 | Chapter 2 System Variables

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMSINGLEHATLAY Type: Integer If set to 0 (On), Mechanical Desktop allows you to place
Initial value: 0 all hatch patterns on a single layer rather than
individual layers. This must be a preset layer that has
already been created.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMSKANGTOL Type: Real Controls the tolerance angle for constraints.

Initial value: 4
Possible values:
[.001 to 10.0]

AMSKMODE Type: Integer Controls whether a sketch is interpreted as precise or

Initial value: 1 rough.
Possible values:
0 - Off (precise sketch)
1 - On (rough sketch)

AMSKSTYLE Type: String Controls AutoCAD linetypes used for sketch boundaries.
Initial value: CONT*
Possible values:
All defined linetypes (Linetype must be entered in
upper case.)

AMSTDDTL Type: String Controls the current drafting standard to apply when
Initial value: ANSI Mechanical Desktop drafting details are created.
Possible values:
None
Default
ANSI
DIN
ISO
JIS
GB

AMSTDSCT Type: String Controls the appearance of cut lines for section views.
Initial value: ANSI
Possible values:
None
ANSI
DIN
ISO
JIS
GB

System Variables | 415

System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMSTDTAP Type: Drawing Controls which drafting standard is used for tapped
Initial value: ANSI holes.
Possible values:
None
ANSI
ISO
JIS
DIN
GB

AMTAPANNOTE Type: Integer Controls the calculation of tapped holes in drawing

Initial value: views.
0 - Pre-Mechanical Possible values:
Desktop 3
1 - Mechanical Desktop 0 - Off
3+ 1 - On

AMULINES Type: Integer Controls the number of U surface display lines.

Initial value: 5
Possible values:
[0 to 1000]

AMVANISH Type: Integer Controls whether a vanish is displayed for ANSI tapped
Initial value: 0 holes.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMVECAUG Type: Real Controls the vector lengths of augmented lines.

Initial value: 0.500
Possible values:
[0.0 to Inf]

AMVECSF Type: Real Controls the vector length of surfaces.

Initial value: 0.500
Possible values:
[0.0 to Inf]

AMVIEWREFRESH Type: Integer Controls drawing view updates.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

416
System Variables (continued)

Variable Characteristic Description

AMVIEWRESTORE Type: Integer Controls assembly view updates after modifications

Initial value: 1 have been made to the edit target.
Possible values:
0 - Off
1 - On

AMVLINES Type: Integer Controls the number of V surface display lines.

Initial value: 3
Possible values:
[0 to 1000]

AMVPBORDER Type: Integer Controls display of drawing viewport borders.

Initial value: 1
Possible values:
0 - Off (borders are visible)
1 - On (borders are invisible)

AMXASSEMBLE Type: Integer Determines if external assembly constraints will be

Initial value: 0 updated. AMXASSEMBLE by default is set to 0 (Off) for
performance reasons.
Possible values:
0 - Off (external constraints are not updated)
1 - On (external constraints are updated)

System Variables | 417